﻿<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?><Search><pages Count="234"><page Index="1"><![CDATA[2024 Yamaha Boat

                                                   AR250 / SX250


                              252S / 252SE / 252SD


                         252XE / 255XE / 255XD







                                OWNER’S/OPERATOR’S MANUAL























                                                                              U.S.A. Edition



                               Read this manual carefully                      LIT-18626-14-73
                         before operating this boat.                              F5K-F8199-14]]></page><page Index="2"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 1  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM




















                                              WARNING:
                                                                             Operating, servicing
                                         and maintaining a recreational marine
                                         vessel can expose you to chemicals
                                         including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,
                                         phthalates, and lead, which are known to
                                         the State of California to cause cancer and
                                         birth defects or other reproductive harm. To
                                         minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust,
                                         service your vessel in a well-ventilated area
                                         and wear gloves or wash your hands
                                         frequently when servicing this vessel.
                                         For more information go to
                                         www.P65warnings.ca.gov/marine

























                        Read this manual carefully before operating this boat. This manual should stay
                        with the boat if it is sold.]]></page><page Index="3"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 1  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                                                    Important manual information

                                  To the owner                     Engine data recording
                        Thank you for choosing a Yamaha boat. This  This model’s ECM stores certain engine data
                        owner’s/operator’s manual contains informa-  to assist in the diagnosis of malfunctions and
                        tion you will need for proper operation, main-  for research, statistical analysis and develop-
                        tenance, and care. A thorough understanding  ment purposes.
                        of these simple instructions will help you to  Although the sensors and recorded data will
                        obtain maximum enjoyment from your new  vary by model, the main data points are:
                        Yamaha. If you have any questions about the   Engine status and  engine  performance
                        operation or maintenance of  your boat,  data
                        please consult a Yamaha Boat Dealer.  This data will be uploaded only when a spe-
                        In this manual, information of particular im-  cial Yamaha diagnostic tool is attached to the
                        portance  is distinguished in the following  engine, such as when maintenance checks or
                        ways:                                 service procedures are performed.
                                                              Yamaha will not disclose this data to a third
                            This is the safety alert symbol. It is used  party except in the following cases. In addi-
                        to alert you to potential personal injury haz-  tion, Yamaha may provide engine data to a
                        ards. Obey all safety messages that follow  contractor in order to outsource services re-
                        this symbol to avoid possible injury or death.  lated to the handling of the engine data. Even
                                                              in this case, Yamaha will require the contrac-
                             WARNING
                                                              tor to properly handle the engine data  we
                        A WARNING indicates a hazardous situa-  provided and Yamaha  will appropriately
                        tion which, if not avoided, could result in  manage the data.
                        death or serious injury.               With the consent of the boat owner
                                                               Where obligated by law
                         NOTICE                                For use by Yamaha in litigation
                        A NOTICE  indicates special precautions   For general  Yamaha-conducted research
                        that must be taken to avoid damage to the  purposes when the data is not related to an
                        boat or other property.                individual engine or owner

                        TIP:
                        A TIP provides key information to make pro-
                        cedures easier or clearer.

                        Because Yamaha has a policy of continuing
                        product improvement, this product may not
                        be exactly as described in this owner’s/oper-
                        ator’s manual. Specifications are subject to
                        change without notice.
                        This manual should be considered a perma-
                        nent part of this boat and should remain with
                        it even if the boat is subsequently sold.]]></page><page Index="4"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 2  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                        Important manual information

                        FCC Compliance                        RF Exposure Compliance
                        This device complies with part 15 of the FCC  This equipment complies with FCC radiation
                        Rules. Operation is subject to the following  exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled
                        two conditions: (1) this device may not cause  environment  and meets the FCC  radio  fre-
                        harmful interference, and (2) this device must  quency (RF)  Exposure Guidelines as this
                        accept  any interference received, including  equipment has very low levels of RF energy.
                        interference that may cause undesired oper-
                        ation.
                                                                         AR250 / SX250
                        This equipment has been tested and found to
                                                              252S / 252SE / 252SD / 252XE / 255XE /
                        comply with the limits for a Class B digital de-    255XD
                        vice, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC rules.  OWNER’S/OPERATOR’S MANUAL
                        These limits are designed to provide reason-  ©2024 by Yamaha Motor Corporation,
                        able protection against harmful interference         U.S.A.
                                                                     1st Edition, August 2023
                        in a residential installation. This equipment
                                                                       All rights reserved.
                        generates, uses, and can radiate radio fre-  Any reprinting or unauthorized use
                        quency energy and may cause harmful inter-  without the written permission of
                        ference to radio communications if not  Yamaha Motor Corporation, U.S.A.
                        installed and used in accordance with the in-  is expressly prohibited.
                                                                        Printed in U.S.A.
                        structions.  However, there  is no guarantee
                                                                       P/N LIT-18626-14-73
                        that interference will not occur in a particular
                        installation. If  this equipment does  cause
                        harmful interference to radio or television re-
                        ception, which can be determined by turning
                        the equipment off and on, the user is encour-
                        aged to try to correct the interference by one
                        of the following measures:
                         Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
                         Increase the separation between  the
                          equipment and the receiver.
                         Connect the equipment into an outlet that
                          is on a different circuit from the GPS de-
                          vice.
                         Consult the dealer  or an  experienced  ra-
                          dio/TV technician for help.

                        FCC CAUTION
                        Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
                        proved by the party responsible for compli-
                        ance  could void the  user’s authority  to
                        operate the equipment.]]></page><page Index="5"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 1  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                                                                       Table of contents

                        General and important labels...........1  Engine shut-off switch................ 41
                          Identification number records..........1  Batteries and battery switches ... 41
                                                                 Main switches
                            Primary Identification (PRI-ID)
                             number.......................................1  (AR250 / SX250 / 252S)........... 43
                            Hull Identification Number (HIN) ...1  Main switch (252SE / 252SD /
                            Engine serial numbers...................1  252XE / 255XE / 255XD).......... 44
                          Emission control information ...........3  “START/STOP” buttons
                                                                   (252SE / 252SD / 252XE /
                            Approval labels of emission            255XE / 255XD)........................ 44
                             control certificate .......................3  Remote control levers................. 44
                            Manufactured date labels .............4  Steering ...................................... 46
                            Star labels (4-star models) ............5  Tilt lever ...................................... 47
                          Important labels ...............................7
                                                               DRiVE X mode (252SD / 255XD).... 48
                            Warning labels ..............................9  Forward....................................... 48
                            Other labels.................................13
                                                                 Reverse....................................... 48
                                                                 Sideways movement .................. 49
                        Safety information.............................14  Dock hold ................................... 49
                          Limitations on who may operate         Pivot turn .................................... 50
                            the boat.......................................14  High mode .................................. 50
                                                                 Sideways movement
                          Cruising limitations.........................15
                                                                   calibration ................................ 50
                          Operational requirements ..............16
                          Required equipment.......................17
                                                              Instrument operation ....................... 52
                          Additional equipment
                                                               Helm controls (AR250 / SX250) ..... 52
                            recommendations .......................18
                                                                 Switch panel ............................... 53
                          Hazard information.........................18  Multi-function display unit
                          Boat characteristics .......................19  operation..................................... 53
                          Night operation ..............................20  Touching the multi-function
                          Wakeboarding and water-skiing ....20     display ..................................... 53
                          Rules of the road............................21  Using the joystick ....................... 53
                                                               Operation buttons.......................... 55
                          Seating locations............................26
                                                                 Controller.................................... 55
                          To get more boating safety
                                                                 Operating the boat at a steady
                            information ..................................27
                                                                   speed (cruise assist) ................ 55
                          Enjoy your boat responsibly...........27  Operating the boat with a
                                                                   minimal wake
                        Description.........................................28  (no-wake mode)....................... 56
                                                                 Operating the boat in reverse
                          Boat glossary .................................28
                                                                   with more thrust
                          Location of main components .......29
                                                                   (reverse RPM control) .............. 56
                            Exterior components...................29  Multi-function display elements..... 58
                            Seats & interior components.......31  Static bar .................................... 59
                            Stern components ......................34  Center display............................. 60
                            Helm components.......................35  Screen tab bar ............................ 60
                            Engine components ....................38
                                                                 Status indicator bar .................... 61
                                                               Home screen ................................. 62
                        Control function operation .............41
                                                               Map screen.................................... 62
                          Boat control functions....................41]]></page><page Index="6"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 2  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                        Table of contents

                            Waypoint.....................................63  Operating the boat in reverse
                            Track ...........................................63  with more thrust
                            Map settings screen....................64  (reverse RPM control) .............. 82
                          Trip screen .....................................66  Multi-function display elements..... 84
                          Media screen..................................67  Screen tab bar ............................ 85
                            Radio screen (AM/FM) ................68  Status indicator bar .................... 86
                            Weather screen...........................68  Operation mode.......................... 87
                            Bluetooth screen.........................69  Home screen ................................. 88
                            Auxiliary screen...........................69  Map screen.................................... 88
                            Zone control screen....................70  Waypoint..................................... 89
                          System control screen ...................70  Track........................................... 89
                          Setting screen ................................71  Map settings screen ................... 90
                            Time setting screen.....................71  Trip screen..................................... 92
                            Depth alarm setting screen.........71  Drive control screen....................... 93
                            Unit setting screen......................72  Media screen ................................. 95
                            Brightness setting screen ...........72  Radio screen (AM/FM)................ 95
                            Maintenance setting screen........72  Weather screen........................... 96
                            Language setting screen.............73  Bluetooth screen ........................ 96
                            Tuner Region setting screen .......73  Auxiliary screen........................... 97
                            Auto Volume setting screen........73  Zone control screen.................... 97
                            Factory reset screen ...................73  System control screen................... 98
                          Warnings ........................................74
                                                               Setting screen................................ 99
                            Check engine warning ................75
                            Low oil pressure warning............75  Time setting screen .................... 99
                            Over temperature warning ..........75  Depth alarm setting screen......... 99
                            House/Start Battery voltage          Unit setting screen.................... 100
                             warning ....................................76  Brightness setting screen......... 100
                            Communication error warning ....76   Maintenance setting screen ..... 100
                            Low fuel level warning.................76  Language setting screen .......... 101
                            Depth warning.............................76  Tuner Region setting screen..... 101
                          Helm controls (except for AR250 /      Auto Volume setting screen...... 101
                                                                 DRiVE X setting screen
                            SX250).........................................77
                                                                   (252SD / 255XD) .................... 101
                            Switch panel ...............................78  Factory reset screen................. 102
                          Multi-function display unit            Flush-out ballasts (252XE /
                            operation.....................................79  255XE / 255XD)...................... 102
                            Touching the multi-function        Warnings...................................... 103
                             display......................................79  Check engine warning .............. 104
                            Using the joystick........................79  Low oil pressure warning.......... 104
                          Operation buttons ..........................81  Over temperature warning........ 104
                            Controller ....................................81  Low/High voltage warning........ 105
                            Operating the boat at a steady       Communication error
                             speed (cruise assist) ................81  warning .................................. 105
                            Operating the boat with a            Low fuel level warning .............. 105
                             minimal wake                        Depth warning .......................... 105
                             (no-wake mode) .......................82
                                                              Equipment operation...................... 106
                                                               Seats............................................ 106]]></page><page Index="7"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 3  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                                                                       Table of contents

                            Driver’s seat ..............................107  Ballast (252XE / 255XE /
                            Passenger’s seat.......................109  255XD) ...................................... 130
                            Engine hood seat ......................109  Wakeboard tower
                            Swim platform seat
                             (252S / 252SE / 252SD /             (except for SX250) .................... 131
                             255XE / 255XD)......................109  Collapsing and setting up the
                            Underwater seats (252S /               wakeboard tower
                             252SE / 252SD)......................110  (AR250 / 252S / 252XE)......... 131
                          Engine hood.................................111  Collapsing and setting up the
                                                                   wakeboard tower (252SE /
                          Storage compartments ................111
                                                                   252SD / 255XE / 255XD) ....... 132
                            Anchor storage compartment...111   Bimini top
                            Front underseat storage
                             compartments........................112  (AR250 / 252S / 252XE) ............ 133
                            Ski locker ..................................112  Setting up the bimini top .......... 133
                            Rear underseat storage               Storing the bimini top ............... 135
                             compartment (starboard) .......113  Trailering with the bimini top .... 136
                            Rear underseat storage               Removing the bimini top........... 136
                             compartment (port) ................114  Installing the bimini top............. 137
                            Enclosed head compartment....114   Bimini top (252SE / 252SD /
                            Driver’s side console                255XE / 255XD)......................... 137
                             compartment..........................115  Removing the bimini top........... 137
                            Stowable table ..........................116  Installing the bimini top............. 138
                            Glove compartment ..................116  Bimini top (SX250) ....................... 138
                            Galley storage compartment           Setting up the bimini top .......... 138
                             (except for AR250 / SX250) ...117   Storing the bimini top in the
                            Wet storage compartment ........118    upright position...................... 139
                            Stern storage compartments ....118   Storing the bimini top in the
                          Walk-through ...............................119
                                                                   fully collapsed position.......... 140
                            Front walk-through....................119  Trailering with the bimini top .... 140
                            Rear walk-through ....................119  Removing the bimini top........... 141
                          Windshield....................................120  Installing the bimini top............. 141
                            Folding mirror (252XE /
                             255XE / 255XD)......................120  Operation and handling
                          Anchor light (AR250) ....................121
                                                              requirements................................... 142
                          Anchor light
                                                               Fuel requirement.......................... 142
                            (except for AR250 / SX250).......122
                                                                 Fuel ........................................... 142
                          Anchor light (SX250).....................123  Engine oil requirement................. 144
                          Bow ladder...................................124  Engine oil .................................. 144
                          Swim platform..............................125  Draining the bilge water............... 147
                            Stern ladder ..............................125  Draining the bilge water on
                            Swim platform shower                   land........................................ 147
                             (252S / 252SE / 252SD) .........126  Draining the bilge water on
                            Remote control keypad.............128  water...................................... 148
                            Side table ..................................128
                            Accessory outlet .......................129  First-time operation ....................... 150
                          USB chargers...............................129
                                                               Engine break-in
                          Wireless charger ..........................130
                                                                 (except for 255XE / 255XD) ...... 150]]></page><page Index="8"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 4  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                        Table of contents

                          Engine break-in                        Anchoring ................................. 175
                            (255XE / 255XD)........................150  Crossing wakes and swells ...... 176
                                                               Post-operation checks ................ 177
                        Pre-operation checks ...................151
                                                              Trailering........................................ 179
                            Pre-operation checklist.............151
                          Pre-operation check points..........152  Trailering the boat........................ 179
                            Pre-launch checks ....................152  Hitch ......................................... 179
                            Steering system checks............152  Trailering checklist.................... 179
                            Remote control lever checks ....152  Backing your trailer................... 180
                            Throttle/shift paddle checks         Launching ................................. 181
                             (252SD / 255XD) ....................153  Loading..................................... 181
                            Fire extinguisher check.............154  Lifting........................................ 182
                            Access port cap check .............156
                            Jet intake checks ......................156  Care and storage .......................... 183
                            Fuel system checks ..................156  Post-operation care..................... 183
                            Engine oil level check................157  Flushing the cooling system..... 183
                            Battery check............................158  Cleaning the boat ..................... 184
                            Bilge water check......................158  Basic stain guide ...................... 186
                            Drain plug check .......................158  Chil Cool Technology vinyl
                            Blower checks...........................159  upholstery Cleaning & Care... 187
                            Navigation and anchor lights         Battery care .............................. 187
                             checks....................................160  Long-term storage....................... 188
                            Horn check................................161
                            Engine shut-off cord (lanyard)       Fuel system............................... 188
                             check .....................................162  Lubrication................................ 188
                            Post-launch checks ..................162  Grease points ........................... 188
                            Engine shut-off switch check....163
                            Cooling water pilot outlet        Maintenance.................................. 191
                             check .....................................163  Maintenance ................................ 191
                            Fuel level check ........................164  Owner’s/operator’s manual ...... 191
                                                                 Removing and installing the
                        Operation .......................................165  engine covers ........................ 191
                          Driving your boat..........................165  Periodic maintenance chart...... 193
                            Getting to know your boat ........165
                            Learning to operate your          Specifications ................................. 196
                             boat........................................165  Specifications (1800 cc engine
                            Starting the engines..................165  models [3-star])......................... 196
                            Stopping the engines................169  Specifications (1800 cc engine
                            Leaving a dock..........................169
                            Turning the boat........................170  models [4-star])......................... 198
                            Boating with passengers ..........171  Specifications (1900 cc engine
                            Stopping the boat .....................172  models) ..................................... 201
                            Boarding from the water ...........173
                            Boarding from the bow .............173  Trouble recovery............................. 204
                            Boarding from a dock or
                             landing jetty............................173  Troubleshooting........................... 204
                            Docking.....................................173  Troubleshooting chart............... 204
                            Beaching ...................................175  Emergency procedures ............... 207]]></page><page Index="9"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 5  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                                                                       Table of contents

                            Jet pump clean-out
                             procedure...............................207
                            Raising the shift gates
                             (252SE / 252SD / 252XE /
                             255XE / 255XD)......................209
                            Power steering system will not
                             operate (252SD / 255XD) .......210
                            Jump-starting............................211
                            Fuse replacement .....................212
                            Running on one engine .............215
                            Towing the boat ........................215

                        Consumer information....................216
                          Limited warranty ..........................216
                          YAMAHA EXTENDED SERVICE
                            (Y.E.S.) ......................................218
                          Sample float plan .........................219

                        Index .................................................220]]></page><page Index="10"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 1  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                        General and important labels

                         Identification number records
                        Record your Primary  Identification (PRI-ID)
                        number, Hull Identification Number (HIN), and
                        engine serial numbers in the spaces provided
                        to assist you in ordering spare  parts  from
                        your Yamaha Boat Dealer. Also, record and
                        keep these ID numbers in a separate place in
                                                                                PRI-I.D.
                        case your boat is stolen.              MODEL
                                                               YAMAHA MOTOR CO.,LTD.
                                                               ASSEMBLED IN U.S.A. WITH FOREIGN & DOMESTIC
                        Primary Identification (PRI-ID) number  COMPONENTS.
                                                               ASSEMBLÉ EN U.S. AVEC DES COMPOSANTS ÉTRANGERS ET
                        The PRI-ID number is stamped on a label at-  DOMESTIQUES.
                        tached inside the engine compartment. (See
                        page 111 for engine hood opening and clos-  Hull Identification Number (HIN)
                        ing procedures.)                      The HIN is stamped into the right rear corner
                        Except for 255XE / 255XD              of the hull.







                              1                                                           1



                                                                YAMC
                        1  Primary Identification (PRI-ID) number
                                                              1  Hull Identification Number (HIN)
                        255XE / 255XD
                                                              Engine serial numbers
                                                        1     The engine serial numbers are stamped on a
                                                              label attached to each engine unit. (See page
                                                              111  for engine  hood opening and  closing
                                                              procedures.)








                        1  Primary Identification (PRI-ID) number






                        1]]></page><page Index="11"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 2  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                                                      General and important labels

                        1800 cc engine models (3-star)        Port side


                                                         1

                                                                 YAMAHA



                                                                 YAMAHA MOTOR CO., LTD.
                                                                 MADE IN JAPAN
                                                                 PAYS D’ORIGINE JAPON

                        1  Engine serial number
                        1800 cc engine models (4-star)

                                                              Starboard side

                                         1

                                                                 YAMAHA



                                                                 YAMAHA MOTOR CO., LTD.
                                                                 MADE IN JAPAN
                                                                 PAYS D’ORIGINE JAPON
                        1  Engine serial number
                        1900 cc engine models



                         1









                        1  Engine serial number








                                                                                                2]]></page><page Index="12"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 3  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                        General and important labels

                          Emission control information        1900 cc engine models
                        These engines conform to U.S. Environmen-
                        tal Protection Agency (EPA) and/or California
                        Air Resources Board (CARB) regulations for
                        marine SI engines applicable at the time of
                        manufacture.
                        The 4-star labels are affixed to models that
                        meet  the Air Resources Board’s emission  1
                        standards for 4-star models. (See page 5 for
                        information on the star labels.)
                        Star labels are not affixed to 3-star models.
                        These engines are certified to operate on reg-  1  Emission control information label
                        ular unleaded gasoline.
                                                              3-star models
                        Approval labels of emission control    EMISSION CONTROL INFORMATION
                                                               THIS ENGINE CONFORMS TO          U.S. EPA EXHAUST REGULATIONS FOR SI MARINE
                        certificate                            ENGINES. REFER TO OWNER’S MANUAL FOR MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS AND
                                                               ADJUSTMENTS.
                        These labels are attached to each engine unit  ENGINE FAMILY :  DISPLACEMENT :                     liters MAX POWER :                         kW
                                                               EPA FEL : HC+NOx               , CO                g/kW-hr
                                                               YAMAHA MOTOR CO.,LTD.
                        and to the inside of the engine compartment.
                        (See page 111 for engine hood opening and
                                                              4-star models
                        closing procedures and page 191 for engine
                        cover removal and installation procedures.)  EMISSION CONTROL INFORMATION
                                                               THIS ENGINE CONFORMS TO    CALIFORNIA AND U.S. EPA EXHAUST REGULATIONS
                        1800 cc engine models                  FOR SI MARINE ENGINES. REFER TO OWNER'S MANUAL FOR MAINTENANCE
                                                               SPECIFICATIONS AND ADJUSTMENTS.
                                                               ENGINE FAMILY :  DISPLACEMENT :                     liters MAX POWER :                         kW
                                                               EPA FEL : HC+NOx               , CO                g/kW-hr  CA FEL : HC+NOx    g/kW-hr
                                        1                      YAMAHA MOTOR CO.,LTD.
                                                              Except for 255XE / 255XD







                        1  Emission control information label
                                                                                            1

                                                              1  Emission control information label









                        3]]></page><page Index="13"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 4  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                                                      General and important labels

                        255XE / 255XD                         Manufactured date labels
                                                  1           These labels are attached to  each engine
                                                              unit. (See page 111 for engine hood opening
                                                              and closing procedures and page 191 for en-
                                                              gine cover  removal and  installation proce-
                                                              dures.)
                                                              1800 cc engine models
                                                                                        1




                        1  Emission control information label
                        3-star models

                         EMISSIONS CONTROL SYSTEM INFORMATION
                         THIS ENGINE CONFORMS TO       U.S. EPA EXHAUST REGULATIONS FOR SI MARINE
                         ENGINES. REFER TO OWNER’S MANUAL FOR MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS AND
                         ADJUSTMENTS. MEETS U.S. EPA EVAP STANDARDS USING CERTIFIED COMPONENTS.
                         ENGINE FAMILY:  DISPLACEMENT:        liters  MAX POWER:             kW
                         EPA FEL: HC+NOx             ,CO             g/kW-hr
                         EPA CERTIFIED EVAP COMPONENTS:
                         YAMAHA MOTOR CO., LTD.               1  Manufactured date label
                                                              1900 cc engine models
                        4-star models
                         EMISSIONS CONTROL SYSTEM INFORMATION  TWC/HO25/MFI/OBD/EECS
                         THIS ENGINE CONFORMS TO       CALIFORNIA AND U.S. EPA EXHAUST REGULATIONS
                         FOR SI MARINE ENGINES. REFER TO OWNER’S MANUAL FOR MAINTENANCE
                         SPECIFICATIONS AND ADJUSTMENTS. MEETS U.S. EPA EVAP STANDARDS USING
                         CERTIFIED COMPONENTS. MEETS        MY CALIFORNIA EVAP EMISSIONS.
                         REGULATIONS FOR SPARK-IGNITION MARINE WATERCRAFT.
                         ENGINE FAMILY:  DISPLACEMENT:            liters  MAX POWER:                 kW
                         EPA FEL: HC+NOx                  ,CO             g/kW-h CA FEL: HC+NOx                                     g/kW-hr
                         EPA CERTIFIED EVAP COMPONENTS:        1
                         ARB EVAP FAMILY:  ARB EVAP EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM:
                         YAMAHA MOTOR CO., LTD.

                                                              1  Manufactured date label


















                                                                                                4]]></page><page Index="14"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 5  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                        General and important labels

                        Star labels (4-star models)
                        This boat is labeled with a California Air Re-
                        sources Board (CARB) star label. See below
                        for a description of your particular label.


                                      1






                                                              Two Stars - Very Low Emission
                                                              The two-star label  identifies engines  that
                                                              meet the Air Resources Board’s Personal
                        1  Star label location                Watercraft and Outboard marine engine 2004
                                                              exhaust emission standards. Engines meet-
                                                              ing these standards have 20% lower emis-
                                                              sions than One Star-Low Emission engines.
                                    1











                        1  Star label location

                        One Star - Low Emission
                        The one-star label identifies engines that
                        meet the Air Resources Board’s Personal
                        Watercraft and Outboard marine engine 2001
                        exhaust emission standards. Engines meet-
                        ing these standards have 75% lower emis-
                        sions than conventional carbureted two-
                        stroke engines. These engines are equivalent
                        to the U.S. EPA’s 2006 standards for marine
                        engines.







                        5]]></page><page Index="15"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 6  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                                                      General and important labels

                        Three Stars - Ultra Low Emission
                        The three-star label identifies engines  that
                        meet the Air Resources Board’s Personal
                        Watercraft and Outboard marine engine 2008
                        exhaust emission standards or the Sterndrive
                        and Inboard marine engine 2003-2008 ex-
                        haust emission standards. Engines meeting
                        these standards have 65% lower emissions
                        than One Star-Low Emission engines.

















                        Four Stars - Super Ultra Low Emission
                        The four-star label identifies engines  that
                        meet the Air Resources Board’s  Sterndrive
                        and Inboard  marine engine 2009 exhaust
                        emission standards. Personal Watercraft and
                        Outboard marine engines may also comply
                        with these standards. Engines meeting these
                        standards have 90% lower emissions  than
                        One Star-Low Emission engines.




















                                                                                                6]]></page><page Index="16"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 7  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                        General and important labels

                                                   Important labels
                        Read the following labels before operating this boat. If you need any additional information,
                        contact a Yamaha Boat Dealer.







                                   12



                                    11



                                                                                       13







                                                11       19

                          3-star models
                                                      14                               16
                                                 11





                            20
                                                                                          19
                          4-star models

                                             20
                                                                              11











                        7]]></page><page Index="17"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 8  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                                                      General and important labels




                               6


                                                                             17    1
                                                                        4










                                                           5                      2
                                                                          3
                                                                  15









                                     7          10                                 7














                                                                                   7
                                        7
                                             8                               9
                                                      18









                                                                                                8]]></page><page Index="18"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 9  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                        General and important labels

                        Warning labels
                        If any of these labels is damaged or missing, contact a Yamaha Boat Dealer for a replacement.
                           1

























                           2
















                           3








                                                              F3A-U415P-20




                        9]]></page><page Index="19"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 10  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                                                      General and important labels


                           4












                           5









                           6


                               Visibility from the seated position at this helm
                                     station is limited.
                             Operation from a standing position may be necessary.
                               Avoid serious injury or death from collisions.
                                Maintain a lookout as required by USCG
                                     Navigation Rules.
                                    Read owners manual.

                           7
























                                                                                               10]]></page><page Index="20"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 11  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                        General and important labels


                          8













                                                                    F3A-U415R-40
                          9













                          10












                          11                                   12
















                        11]]></page><page Index="21"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 12  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                                                      General and important labels


                           13
                           Except for 255XE / 255XD







                                                          F1C-U416B-20
                           255XE / 255XD






                                                            20
                           14
                           Except for SX250










                           15                                16
                           252XE / 255XE / 255XD


                           Improper use of the ballast system can
                           overload the boat, causing poor handling and
                           increased risk of swamping.                                       20
                           Ballast system adds 1685 lb (764 kg) when full.
                           Include this weight when making sure your
                           load does not exceed the weight shown on
                           the Maximum Capacities Label.


                           Drain ballast completely before trailering the
                           boat to reduce the risk of a towing accident.
                           The Increased weight of ballast can cause
                           unsafe towing conditions due to negative
                           tongue weight, including decreased tow
                           vehicle stability and greater chance of a
                           runaway trailer that has come off the hitch.





                                                                                               12]]></page><page Index="22"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 13  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                        General and important labels

                        Other labels

                           17
                           AR250 / SX50 / 252S                252XE / 255XE / 255XD
                           / 252SE / 252SD

                           MAXIMUM CAPACITIES                 MAXIMUM CAPACITIES
                             12    PERSONS OR 2200   LBS.       12    PERSONS OR 2200   LBS.
                                2600 POUNDS, PERSONS, GEAR         2350 POUNDS, PERSONS, GEAR
                           THIS BOAT COMPLIES WITH U.S. COAST GUARD SAFETY  THIS BOAT COMPLIES WITH U.S. COAST GUARD SAFETY
                           STANDARDS IN EFFECT ON THE DATE OF CERTIFICATION  STANDARDS IN EFFECT ON THE DATE OF CERTIFICATION
                           MEETS U.S. EPA EVAP STANDARDS USING CERTIFIED COMPONENTS  MEETS U.S. EPA EVAP STANDARDS USING CERTIFIED COMPONENTS
                           MANUFACTURER: YAMAHA JET BOAT MANUFACTURING USA, INC.  MANUFACTURER: YAMAHA JET BOAT MANUFACTURING USA, INC.
                           MODEL:                   VONORE, TN  MODEL:                 VONORE, TN
                            DESIGN COMPLIANCE WITH NMMA REQUIREMENTS IS VERIFIED.  DESIGN COMPLIANCE WITH NMMA REQUIREMENTS IS VERIFIED.
                            MANUFACTURER RESPONSIBLE FOR PRODUCTION CONTROL.  MANUFACTURER RESPONSIBLE FOR PRODUCTION CONTROL.


                           18                                 19

















                           20
                            All applicable electrical system components installed as
                            original equipment meet appropriate U.S.C.G. requirements
                            for ignition protection. (Ref. 33 CFR 183.410 and 183.440)
                             YAMAHA                    60E-83627-00












                        13]]></page><page Index="23"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 14  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                                                                     Safety information

                                                                  Limitations on who may
                        The safe use and operation of this boat is    operate the boat
                        dependent upon the use of proper operat-   Yamaha recommends a minimum operator
                        ing techniques, as well as upon the com-  age of 16 years old.
                        mon sense, good judgment, and expertise  Adults must supervise use by minors.
                        of the operator. Every operator should  Know the operator age and training re-
                        know the following  requirements  before  quirements for your state. A boating safety
                        operating the boat.                    course is recommended  and may be  re-
                         Before operating the boat, read the own-  quired in your state. You can find local rules
                          er’s/operator’s manual,  the Operation  In-  by contacting the United States Coast
                          struction card, and all labels on the boat.  Guard (USCG), the National Association of
                          These materials should give you an under-  State Boating Law Administrators, or your
                          standing of the boat and its operation.  local Power Squadron.
                         Never allow anyone to  operate this boat   This boat is designed to carry the operator,
                          until they too have read this owner’s/oper-  up to 11 passengers, and cargo. Never ex-
                          ator’s manual, the Operation Instruction  ceed the maximum load limit or allow more
                          card, and all labels.                than 12 persons (or 11 persons if a wake-
                                                               boarder or water-skier is being pulled) to
                                                               ride in the boat at any time. Weight distri-
                                                               bution affects performance. Keep weight in
                                                               the boat low and evenly distributed from
                                                               side-to-side  and bow-to-stern. Remove
                                                               any unnecessary cargo and store it on
                                                               shore.

                                                                Maximum load (252XE / 255XE / 255XD):
                                                                  Total  weight  of cargo, operator, and
                                                                  passengers:
                                                                    1066 kg (2350 lb)
                                                                  Total weight of operator and passen-
                                                                  gers:
                                                                    998 kg (2200 lb)
                                                                Maximum load (AR250 / SX250 / 252S /
                                                                252SE / 252SD):
                                                                  Total  weight  of cargo, operator, and
                                                                  passengers:
                                                                    1180 kg (2600 lb)
                                                                  Total weight of operator and passen-
                                                                  gers:
                                                                    998 kg (2200 lb)




                                                                                               14]]></page><page Index="24"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 15  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                            Safety information

                               Cruising limitations            This is a high-performance boat—not a toy.
                         Scan  constantly for people, objects,  and  Sharp turns or jumping wakes or waves
                          other watercraft. Be alert for conditions  can increase the risk of back/spinal injury
                          that limit your visibility or block your vision  (paralysis), facial injuries, and broken legs,
                          of others.                           ankles, and other  bones. Do not jump
                                                               wakes or waves.
                                                               Do not  operate  the boat  in rough water,
                                                               bad weather, or when visibility is poor; this
                                                               may lead to an accident causing injury or
                                                               death. Be alert to the possibility of adverse
                                                               weather. Take note of  weather  forecasts
                                                               and the prevailing weather conditions be-
                                                               fore setting out in your boat.
                                                               Never operate in water that is less than
                         Operate defensively at safe speeds and  90 cm (3 ft) deep from the bottom of the
                          keep a safe distance from people, objects,  boat, otherwise you increase your chance
                          and other watercraft.                of hitting a submerged object, which could
                         Do not follow directly behind other water-  result in injury.
                          craft.
                         Do not go near others to spray or splash
                          them with water.
                         Avoid sharp turns or other maneuvers that
                          make it hard for others to avoid you or un-
                          derstand where you are going.                    90 cm (3 ft)
                         Avoid  areas with  submerged objects or
                          shallow water.
                         Take early action to avoid collisions. Re-
                          member, boats do not have brakes.
                         Do not pull the remote control levers back   Leave a “float plan” with a responsible per-
                          to idle when trying to steer away from ob-  son on shore. Tell where you plan to go and
                          jects—you need throttle to steer. Always  when you plan to arrive, and provide a de-
                          check throttle, shift, and steering controls  scription of your boat. Advise this person if
                          for proper operation before starting boat.  your plans change and also when you ar-
                         Operate within your limits and avoid ag-  rive to prevent false alarms. A sample float
                          gressive maneuvers to reduce the risk of  plan is included on page 219.
                          loss of control, ejection, and collision.   Follow navigation rules and state and local
                                                               laws that apply to your boat.








                        15]]></page><page Index="25"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 16  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                                                                     Safety information

                           Operational requirements            Attach the engine shut-off cord (lanyard) to
                         The operator and all passengers must wear  the PFD and keep it free from the steering
                          a U.S. Coast Guard (USCG) approved per-  wheel or other controls so that the engines
                          sonal flotation device (PFD).        stop if the operator accidentally leaves the
                                                               helm. Failure to attach the engine shut-off
                                                1              cord (lanyard) could  result in a runaway
                                                               boat if the operator is ejected.
                                                               After operation, remove the engine shut-off
                                                               cord (lanyard) and the main switch keys to
                                                               avoid accidental starting or unauthorized
                                                               use by children or others.

                                                              AR250 / SX250 / 252S


                        1  PFD                                             1

                         Eye protection is recommended to keep
                          wind, water, and glare from the sun out of                2
                          your eyes while you operate your boat. Re-
                          straining straps for eyewear are made
                          which are designed to  float should  your
                          eyewear fall in the water.
                         Never operate the boat after consuming al-
                          cohol or taking drugs.              1  Engine shut-off switch
                                                              2  Engine shut-off cord (lanyard)
                         For reasons of safety and proper care of
                          the boat, always perform the pre-operation
                                                              252SE / 252SD / 252XE / 255XE / 255XD
                          checks listed on page 151 before operating
                          the boat.
                         Passengers must always sit in a designat-
                          ed seating area, place  feet  on the deck,                 2
                          and hold on to the handgrips, handrails, or
                          straps when the boat is in motion.
                         Always consult your doctor on whether it is    1
                          safe for you to ride in this boat if you are
                          pregnant or in poor health.
                         Do not attempt to modify this boat.
                          Modifications  to  your boat may reduce
                                                              1  Engine shut-off switch
                          safety and reliability, and render the boat
                                                              2  Engine shut-off cord (lanyard)
                          unsafe or illegal to use.




                                                                                               16]]></page><page Index="26"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 17  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                            Safety information

                         Scan  constantly  for swimmers and stay   Required equipment
                          away from swimming areas. Swimmers are  The  U.S. Coast Guard  (USCG) has  regula-
                          hard to see and you could accidentally hit  tions which describe minimum standards of
                          someone in the water.               safety. You must comply with these regula-
                         Avoid being hit by another boat. You  tions, which  apply to boats like your boat
                          should always take responsibility to watch  which are less than 26 feet long.
                          for traffic; other boaters may not be watch-   Personal flotation devices (PFD):
                          ing for you. If they do not see you, or you  Type I, II, or III as required for all people on
                          maneuver more quickly than other boaters  board (see “Operational requirements” for
                          expect, you risk a collision.        more information), plus at least one Type IV
                         Maintain a safe distance from other boats  (throwable type).
                          and watercraft, and  also watch  for  ski   Fire extinguisher:
                          ropes or fishing lines. Obey the “Rules of  At least one 5-B (B-1) type hand-held por-
                          the road”, and be sure to check behind you  table fire extinguisher.
                          before  making a turn.  (See  “Rules of the   Visual distress signals:
                          road” on page 21.)                   It is recommended that a USCG-approved
                                                               day/night pyrotechnic device be stored on
                                                               your boat. A mirror can also be used as an
                                                               emergency signal. Contact  your  Yamaha
                                                               Boat Dealer or the Coast Guard for more
                                                               information.
                                                               Sound signalling device:
                                                               Your boat is equipped with a horn that can
                                                               be used to signal other boats. See “Rules
                                                               of the road” for more information.
                                                               Navigation lights:
                                                               Your boat is equipped  with navigation
                                                               lights for use between sunset and sunrise,
                                                               and during periods of reduced visibility,
                                                               such as fog. Be sure these lights are work-
                                                               ing and  are turned on when  necessary.
                                                               (See pages 70, 98, and 121 for more infor-
                                                               mation.)














                        17]]></page><page Index="27"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 18  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                                                                     Safety information

                              Additional equipment                  Hazard information
                                recommendations                Never start the engines or let them run for
                        The following equipment can help make your  any length of time in an enclosed area. Ex-
                        boating experience safer and more enjoy-  haust fumes contain carbon monoxide, a
                        able:                                  colorless, odorless gas that may cause
                         Mooring fenders and lines.           loss of consciousness and death within a
                         Anchor with suitable line (a “Danforth” type  short time. Always operate the boat in an
                          anchor and line that is at least 6 times the  open area.
                          depth of the water where you will drop an-  It is also important to have the engines off
                          chor are recommended).               when anyone is using the ladder on models
                         Manual-type bilge pump.              equipped with one because of the carbon
                         First-aid kit.                       monoxide in the exhaust gases coming
                         Waterproof flashlight with extra batteries.  from underneath the step.
                         Tool kit with assorted screwdrivers, pliers,   Do  not place  magnets or objects  with a
                          wrenches (including metric  sizes), and  strong magnetic force near the throt-
                          electrical tape.                     tle/shift paddles. The electronic  throttle
                         Oar  or paddle  (look  for one with a  boat  mechanism of the paddles can be adverse-
                          hook on the other end).              ly affected, which could cause loss of con-
                         Spare parts, such as fuses.          trol.  In addition, do  not place objects
                         Navigation charts for the waters where you  susceptible to magnetic forces (i.e., credit
                          will be boating.                     cards, watches, etc.) close to the paddles.
                         Tow-rope.































                                                                                               18]]></page><page Index="28"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 19  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                            Safety information

                              Boat characteristics             Keep away from the intake grates while the
                         Jet thrust turns the boat. Moving the re-  engines  are on. Items such as  long  hair,
                          mote control levers completely back to idle  loose clothing, or PFD straps can become
                          or the neutral position produces only mini-  entangled in moving parts, resulting in se-
                          mum thrust. If you are traveling at speeds  vere injury or drowning.
                          above  trolling, you will have rapidly de-   Never insert any object into the jet thrust
                          creasing ability to steer without throttle.  nozzles while the engines are running. Se-
                          You may still have some turning ability im-  vere injury or death could result from com-
                          mediately after moving the remote control  ing in contact with the rotating parts of the
                          levers back to idle, but once the engines  jet pumps.
                          slow down, the boat will no longer respond
                          to steering  wheel input until  you apply
                          throttle again or you reach a trolling speed.
                          Practice turning in an open area without
                          obstructions until you have a good feel for                         2
                          the maneuver.
                         This  Yamaha boat is  water-jet propelled.
                          The pumps are directly connected to the       1
                          engines. This means that the jet thrust will
                          produce some  movement whenever  the
                          engines are running. The boat has a “neu-  1  Intake grate
                          tral” position, but since the boat is always  2  Jet thrust nozzle
                          producing thrust while the engines are run-
                          ning, some forward or reverse movement   Stop the engines and remove the clip from
                          may occur.                           the engine shut-off switch before removing
                         Do not use the reverse function  to slow  any debris or weeds, which may have col-
                          down or stop the boat above trolling speed  lected around the jet intakes. (See page
                          as it could cause you to lose control, be  207 for more information.)
                          ejected, or impact the steering wheel  or
                          other parts of the boat. This could increase
                          the risk of serious injury. It could also dam-
                          age the shift mechanisms.
                         Reverse can be used to slow down or stop
                          during slow-speed maneuvering, such as
                          when docking. Once the engines are idling,
                          shift to reverse and gradually increase en-
                          gine speed. Make sure that there are no
                          obstacles  or people behind you before
                          shifting into reverse.





                        19]]></page><page Index="29"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 20  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                                                                     Safety information

                                 Night operation                 Wakeboarding and water-
                         When using your boat before dawn or after         skiing
                          dusk, you must have both bow and anchor  You can use the boat to tow a wakeboarder
                          lights  operating. When  at anchor in the  or water-skier, using the tow pylon or the ski
                          dark, the anchor light must be lit. (See pag-  tow hook provided.
                          es 70, 98, and 121 for instructions.)  It is the boat operator’s responsibility to be
                         The  navigation  lights should be replaced  alert to the safety of the wakeboarder or wa-
                          after a certain period of time.     ter-skier and others. Know and follow all state
                          If the navigation light bulb is an incandes-  and local regulations in effect for the waters
                          cent bulb, replace it after 1 year.  in which you will be operating.
                          If the navigation light bulb is LED, replace it  The following are some important consider-
                          every 5 years.                      ations for  minimizing risks while  pulling  a
                         Except for AR250 / SX250: Docking lights  wakeboarder or water-skier.
                          are to be used for low speed, close-quarter   The wakeboarder or water-skier should
                          maneuvering only. Docking  lights  may  wear an approved PFD, preferably a bright-
                          cause temporary blindness in other vessels  ly colored one so boat operators can see
                          when used improperly.                the person being pulled.
                                                               The wakeboarder or water-skier should
                                                               wear protective clothing. Severe internal in-
                                                               juries can occur if water is forced into body
                                                               cavities as a result of falling into the water
                                                               or while reboarding.  Normal swimwear
                                                               does not adequately protect against force-
                                                               ful water entry into the rectum or vagina.
                                                               The  person being pulled should wear  a
                                                               wetsuit bottom or clothing  that provides
                                                               equivalent protection. Such clothing in-
                                                               cludes thick, tightly woven, sturdy, and
                                                               snug-fitting apparel such  as denim,  but
                                                               does not include spandex or similar fab-
                                                               rics, like those used in bicycle shorts.

















                                                                                               20]]></page><page Index="30"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 21  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                            Safety information

                         A second person should be on board as a     Rules of the road
                          spotter to watch the wakeboarder or wa-  Your Yamaha boat is legally considered a
                          ter-skier; in most states, it is required by  powerboat. Operation of the boat must be
                          law. Let the person being pulled direct the  in accordance with the rules and regula-
                          operator’s control of speed and direction  tions governing the waterway on which it
                          with hand signals.  Be sure the seat is  is used.
                          locked in place (see page 106) before get-  Just as there are rules that apply when you
                          ting underway.                      are driving on streets and highways, there are
                         When preparing to pull a wakeboarder or  waterway rules that apply when you are oper-
                          water-skier, operate the boat at the slowest  ating your boat. These rules are used interna-
                          possible speed until the boat is well away  tionally, and are also enforced by the United
                          from the person being pulled and slack in  States Coast Guard and local agencies. You
                          the tow-rope is taken up. Make sure that  should be aware of these rules, and follow
                          the rope is not looped around anything.   them whenever you encounter another vessel
                          After checking that the wakeboarder or wa-  on the water.
                          ter-skier is ready and that there is no traffic  Several sets of rules prevail according to
                          or other obstacles, apply enough throttle to  geographic location, but are all basically the
                          raise the person.                   same as the International Rules of the Road.
                         Make smooth, wide turns. The boat is ca-  The rules presented here in this owner’s/op-
                          pable of very sharp turns, which could ex-  erator’s manual are condensed, and have
                          ceed the  abilities of the wakeboarder  or  been  provided for  your convenience only.
                          water-skier. Keep the person being towed  Consult your local U.S. Coast Guard Auxiliary
                          at least 50 m (164 ft), about twice the dis-  or Department of Motor Vehicles for a com-
                          tance of a standard tow-rope, away from  plete set of rules governing the waters in
                          any potential hazard.               which you will be operating your boat.
                         The operators of boats and other water-  Steering and sailing rules
                          craft may not be aware that you are pulling  Whenever two vessels on the water meet one
                          a wakeboarder or water-skier. Together  another, one vessel has the right-of-way; it is
                          with the  spotter, pay  attention to  others  called the “stand-on” vessel. The vessel that
                          around you and cruise at safe speeds.  does not have the right-of-way is called the
                         Be alert to the hazard of the tow-rope han-  “give-way” or “burdened” vessel. These rules
                          dle  snapping  back at the boat when the  determine which vessel has the right-of-way,
                          wakeboarder or water-skier falls or is un-  and what each vessel should do.
                          able to get up.                     Stand-on vessel
                        See pages 9 and 131 for wakeboard tower  The vessel with the right-of-way has the duty
                        use.                                  to continue its course and speed, except to
                                                              avoid an immediate  collision.  When you
                                                              maintain your direction and speed, the other
                                                              vessel will be able to determine how best to
                                                              avoid you.




                        21]]></page><page Index="31"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 22  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                                                                     Safety information

                        Give-way vessel                       In the following illustration, your boat is in the
                        The vessel which does not have the right-of-  center. You should give the right-of-way to
                        way has the duty to take positive and timely  any vessels shown in the white area (you are
                        action to stay out of the way of the stand-on  the give-way vessel). Any vessels in the shad-
                        vessel. Normally, you should not cross in  ed area must yield to you (they are the give-
                        front of the vessel with the right-of-way. You  way vessels). Both you and the meeting ves-
                        should slow down or change directions brief-  sel must alter course to avoid each other.
                        ly  and pass  behind the other vessel. You
                        should always move in such a way that the
                        operator of the other vessel can see what you
                        are doing.
                        The General Prudential  Rule regarding the
                        right-of-way is that if a collision appears un-
                        avoidable, neither boat has the right-of-way.
                        Both boats must avoid the collision.
                        In other words, follow the standard rules ex-
                        cept when a collision will occur unless both
                        vessels try to avoid each other. If that is the
                                                              Meeting
                        case, both vessels become give-way ves-
                                                              If you are meeting another power-driven ves-
                        sels.
                                                              sel head-on, and are close enough to run the
                        Rules when encountering vessels
                                                              risk of collision, neither of you has the right-
                        There are three main situations that you may
                                                              of-way. Both of you should alter course to
                        encounter with other vessels which  could
                                                              avoid an accident. You should keep the other
                        lead to a collision unless the Steering Rules
                                                              vessel on your port (left) side. This rule does
                        are followed:
                                                              not apply if both of you will clear one another
                        Meeting: you are approaching another vessel
                                                              if you continue on your set course and speed.
                        head-on.
                        Crossing: you  are traveling  across another
                        vessel’s path.
                        Overtaking: you are passing or being passed
                        by another vessel.















                                                                                               22]]></page><page Index="32"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 23  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                            Safety information

                        Crossing                              Other special situations
                        When two power-driven vessels are crossing  There are three other rules you  should be
                        each other’s path close enough to run the risk  aware of when operating your boat around
                        of collision, the vessel which has the other on  other vessels.
                        the starboard (right) side must keep out of the  Narrow channels and bends
                        way of the other. If the other vessel is on your  When navigating in narrow channels, you
                        starboard (right) side, you must keep out of  should keep to the right when it is safe and
                        its way; you are the give-way vessel. If the  practical to do so. If the operator of a power-
                        other vessel is on your port (left) side, remem-  driven vessel is preparing to go around a
                        ber that you should maintain course and di-  bend that may obstruct the view of other wa-
                        rection, provided the other vessel gives you  ter vessels, the operator should sound a pro-
                        the right-of-way, as it should.       longed  blast of four to six seconds  on  the
                                                              horn. If another vessel is around the bend, it
                                                              too should sound the horn. Even if no reply is
                                                              heard, however, the vessel should still pro-
                                                              ceed around the bend with caution.
                                                              Fishing vessel right-of-way
                                                              All vessels fishing with nets, lines, or trawls
                                                              are considered to be “fishing vessels” under
                                                              the International Rules. Vessels with trolling
                                                              lines are not considered fishing vessels. Fish-
                                                              ing vessels have the right-of-way regardless
                                                              of position. Fishing vessels cannot, however,
                        Overtaking                            impede the passage of other vessels in nar-
                        If you are passing another vessel, you are the
                                                              row channels.
                        give-way vessel. This means that the other
                                                              Sailing vessel right-of-way
                        vessel is expected to maintain its course and
                                                              Sailing vessels should normally be given the
                        speed. You must stay out of its way until you
                                                              right-of-way. The exceptions to this are:
                        are clear of it. Likewise, if another vessel is
                                                              (1) When the sailing vessel is overtaking the
                        passing you, you should maintain your speed
                                                                 power-driven  vessel, the power-driven
                        and direction so that the other  vessel can
                                                                 vessel has the right-of-way.
                        steer itself around you.
                                                              (2) Sailing vessels should keep clear of any
                                                                 fishing vessel.
                                                              (3) In a  narrow channel, a sailing vessel
                                                                 should not hamper the safe passage of a
                                                                 power-driven vessel that can navigate
                                                                 only in such a channel.
                                                              Reading buoys and other markers
                                                              The waters of the United States are marked
                                                              for safe navigation by the lateral system of
                                                              buoyage. Simply put, buoys and markers
                                                              have an arrangement of shapes, colors, num-


                        23]]></page><page Index="33"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 24  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                                                                     Safety information

                        bers, and lights to show which side  of the
                        buoy a boater should pass on when navigat-
                        ing in a particular direction. The markings on
                        these buoys are oriented from the perspec-
                        tive of being entered from seaward (the boat-
                        er is going towards the harbor). Red buoys
                        are passed on your starboard (right) side
                        when proceeding from open water into port,
                        and black buoys are to your port (left) side. An
                        easy  way to  remember  the meaning of the
                        colors  is the phrase “red right returning.”
                        When navigating out of the harbor, your posi-
                        tion with respect to the buoys should be re-
                        versed; red buoys should be  to port and
                        black buoys to starboard.
                        Many bodies of water used by boaters are
                        entirely within the boundaries of a particular
                        state. The Uniform State Waterway Marking
                        System has been devised for these waters.




































                                                                                               24]]></page><page Index="34"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 25  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                            Safety information

                        This system uses buoys and signs with distinctive shapes and colors to show regulatory or
                        advisory information. These markers are white with black letters and orange borders. They
                        signify speed zones, restricted areas, danger areas, and general information.





















































                        Remember, markings may vary by geographic location. Always consult local boating author-
                        ities before riding your boat in unfamiliar waters.




                        25]]></page><page Index="35"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 26  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                                                                     Safety information

                                                   Seating locations
                        Sit in the designated locations while sailing.
                        The seating locations are as follows.


















                          : Seating locations
                          : Do not occupy the stern of the boat when engines are running due to the possibility of car-
                           bon monoxide poisoning and of falling.




































                                                                                               26]]></page><page Index="36"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 27  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                            Safety information

                           To get more boating safety           Enjoy your boat responsibly
                                   information                You share the areas you enjoy when operat-
                        Be informed about boating safety. Additional  ing your boat with others and with nature. So
                        publications and information can be obtained  your enjoyment includes a responsibility  to
                        from many organizations,  including the fol-  treat these other people, and the lands, wa-
                        lowing.                               ters, and wildlife with respect and courtesy.
                        United States Coast Guard             Whenever and wherever you are boating,
                        Consumer Affairs Staff (G-BC)         think of yourself as the guest of those around
                        Office of Boating, Public, and Consumer Af-  you. Remember, for example, that the sound
                        fairs                                 of your boat may be music to you, but it could
                        US Coast Guard Headquarters           be just noise to others. And the exciting
                        Washington, D.C. 20593-0001           splash of your wake can make waves others
                        http://www.uscgboating.org            won’t enjoy. Avoid riding close to shoreline
                        Other sources                         homes and waterfowl nesting areas or other
                        You can find local rules by contacting the Na-  wildlife areas, and keep a respectful distance
                        tional Association of State Boating Law Ad-  from fishermen, other boats, swimmers, and
                        ministrators, or your local Power Squadron.  populated beaches. When travel in areas like
                        Boat Education and Training           these  is unavoidable, operate slowly and
                        The Online Boating Safety Course, available  obey all laws.
                        through the watercraft section of  the  Remember that pollution can be harmful to
                        yamaha-motor.com  website, is a free, 50-  the environment. Do not refuel or add oil
                        question learning course available to the  where a spill could cause damage to nature.
                        public. Upon successful completion of 80  Keep your surroundings pleasant for the peo-
                        percent or better, the user can request a cer-  ple  and wildlife that share the  waterways:
                        tificate of completion by mail or can down-  don’t litter!
                        load one immediately. The  Online  Boating  When you go boating responsibly, with  re-
                        Safety Course, provided by  the Boat/US  spect and courtesy for others, you help en-
                        Foundation, is approved by the National As-  sure  that our waterways stay open  for  the
                        sociation of State Boating Law Administra-  enjoyment of a variety of recreational oppor-
                        tors (NASBLA) and recognized by the United  tunities.
                        States Coast Guard. This course meets the
                        education requirement for those states that
                        recognize  non-proctored,  NASBLA-ap-
                        proved courses.
                          The Online Boating Safety Course:
                          http://www.boatus.org/









                        27]]></page><page Index="37"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 28  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                                                                                Description

                                                     Boat glossary



                          TERM          DEFINITION
                          Bow           The front part of the boat.
                          Deck          The “floor” or upper structure which covers the hull.
                          Give-way      The vessel that must yield the right-of-way when two boats meet.
                          Gunwale       The meeting junction of the deck and hull; the upper edge around the
                                        boat. Pronounced “gunnel.”
                          Hatch         An opening in the deck that provides access below.
                          Helm          The steering console.
                          Hull          The basic part of the boat; the underside.
                          Lanyard       The cord or tether that connects the operator to the engine shut-off
                                        switch so the engines will stop if the operator accidentally leaves the
                                        helm.
                          PFD           A personal flotation device, also known as “life jacket.”
                          Planing       Traveling at a speed fast enough so the boat has leveled out and is
                                        skimming on top of the water. There is a wake.
                          Port          The left side of the boat.
                          Stand-on      The vessel with the right-of-way when two boats meet.
                          Starboard     The right side of the boat.
                          Stern         The back part of the boat.
                          Sub-planing   Traveling at a medium speed. The bow of the boat is out of the water,
                                        but you are still traveling through the water. There is a wake.
                          Transom       The vertical part of the stern.
                          Trolling      Traveling at idle speed, using little or no throttle. The boat is down in the
                                        water and it is not leaving a wake.
                          Wake          The visible track of disturbed water that the boat leaves behind as it
                                        moves in the water.














                                                                                               28]]></page><page Index="38"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 29  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                        Description

                                            Location of main components
                        Exterior components
                                                                                  252S / 252SE
                                                                                  / 252SD

                                                 2                                           3
                                         1





                                                                                     4

                                                                              5
                                                                        1


                                                      4
                                              6
                                         7
                                     8
                                9                  13
                                               12
                                           11
                                       10
                                                                                             14

                                                                                         4



                                    17                                        15
                                                                          16
                                                                       4
                                         18                      11
                        1  Handrail                           10 Table bracket (page 128)
                        2  Windshield (page 120)              11 Flushing hose connector (page 183)
                        3  Swim platform shower (page 126)    12 12 V DC outlet (page 129)
                        4  Cleat                              13 Ski tow hook
                        5  Fuel tank filler cap (page 142)    14 Horn (page 161)
                        6  Anchor storage compartment (page 111)  15 Bilge pump outlet (page 148)
                        7  Bow eye                            16 Cooling water pilot outlet (page 163)
                        8  Bow light (page 70, 98)            17 Swim platform (page 125)
                        9  Bow ladder (page 124)              18 Reboarding grip


                        29]]></page><page Index="39"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 30  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                                                                                Description





                           255XE / 255XD                      252XE
                                                3                       5       3
                                     2
                                9                                9
                                                                4
                               1





                           252SE / 252SD                      252S
                                      2         3                       5       3


                                                                 4
                               1






                           AR250                              SX250
                                     5  6                            7        8



                              4









                        1  Wakeboard tower (page 131)
                        2  Bimini top (page 137)
                        3  Anchor light (page 122)
                        4  Wakeboard tower (page 131)
                        5  Bimini top (page 133)
                        6  Anchor light (page 121)
                        7  Anchor light (page 123)
                        8  Bimini top (page 138)
                        9  Wakeboard tower rack

                                                                                               30]]></page><page Index="40"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 31  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                        Description

                        Seats & interior components










                               1      2                    3         4         5       6
















                              12     11                      10         9     8    7   6









                        1  Front starboard seat (front) (page 106)
                        2  Front starboard seat (rear) (page 106, 112)
                        3  Driver’s seat (page 107)
                        4  Rear starboard seat (page 106, 113)
                        5  Starboard engine hood seat (page 106, 111)
                        6  Swim platform seat (252S / 252SE / 252SD /
                           255XE / 255XD) (page 109)
                        7  Center seat (page 109)
                        8  Port engine hood seat (page 106, 111)
                        9  Rear port seat (page 106, 114)
                        10 Passenger’s seat (page 106, 109)
                        11 Front port seat (rear) (page 106, 112)
                        12 Front port seat (front) (page 106)





                        31]]></page><page Index="41"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 32  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                                                                                Description



                                                                                  3
                                          1






                                                                4
                                          2                                                  6
                                                                          5

                                  7
                                                    8
                                                                        9

                                                                                   10

















                                                           11
                        1  Anchor storage compartment (page 111)
                        2  Front underseat storage compartment (page
                           112)
                        3  Stowable table (page 116)
                        4  USB charger (page 129)
                        5  Glove compartment (page 116)
                        6  Enclosed head compartment (page 114)
                        7  Stern storage compartment (page 118)
                        8  Wet storage compartment (page 118)
                        9  Driver’s side console compartment (page 115)
                        10 Ski locker (page 112)
                        11 Rear underseat storage compartment (page
                           113)


                                                                                               32]]></page><page Index="42"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 33  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                        Description



                          Courtesy (Interior) light











                          Beverage holder










                          Speaker






                                                                        *1


                                                               *1 = Except for AR250 / SX250
























                        33]]></page><page Index="43"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 34  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                                                                                Description

                        Stern components







                                                                  1






                              2  3   4                                             4   3  2
                                         5                                     5
                                                   6
                                                       7










                                8                            9               10         8


                        1  Stern ladder (page 125)
                        2  Stern eye
                        3  SurfPointe WakeBooster (255XE / 255XD)
                        4  Shift gate (page 45)
                        5  Jet thrust nozzle
                        6  Underwater light (page 98)
                        7  Articulating keel (except for 252SD / 255XD)
                           (page 46)
                        8  Intake grate
                        9  Hull drain plug (page 147)
                        10 Water temperature/water depth sensor












                                                                                               34]]></page><page Index="44"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 35  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                        Description

                        Helm components
                        AR250 / SX250

                                1    2


                                                       4              5
                               HORN
                                     BILGE



                                  3                                             6




                                                                                   7      8














                                                       12
                                                                            10
                                                                                            9
                                                                           11
                           13


                        1  “HORN” switch (page 53)            11 Engine shut-off cord (lanyard) (page 41)
                        2  “BILGE” switch (page 53)           12 Steering wheel (page 46)
                        3  Main switch (page 43)              13 Tilt lever (page 47)
                        4  Multi-function display unit (page 53)
                        5  Wireless charger (page 130)
                        6  Controller (page 55)
                        7  USB charger (page 129)
                        8  Aux input (page 69)
                        9  Remote control lever (page 44)
                        10 Engine shut-off switch (page 41)


                        35]]></page><page Index="45"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 36  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                                                                                Description

                        252S






                                                       2               3




                                  1                                             4
                                                                                   5
                                                                                       6
                                                                                         7
                                                                                        8
                                                                             10
                                                                                  9








                                                            14       15
                                                       16
                                                                            12
                                                                                            11
                                                                            13
                           17


                        1  Main switch (page 43)              12 Engine shut-off switch (page 41)
                        2  Multi-function display unit (page 79)  13 Engine shut-off cord (lanyard) (page 41)
                        3  Wireless charger (page 130)        14 USB charger (page 129)
                        4  Controller (page 81)               15 Aux input (page 97)
                        5  “HORN” switch (page 78)            16 Steering wheel (page 46)
                        6  “BILGE” switch (page 78)           17 Tilt lever (page 47)
                        7  “BLOWER” switch (page 78)
                        8  “ACC”2 switch (page 79)
                        9  “ACC”1 switch (page 79)
                        10 “NAV LIGHTS” switch (page 79)
                        11 Remote control lever (page 44)


                                                                                               36]]></page><page Index="46"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 37  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                        Description

                        252SE / 252SD / 252XE / 255XE / 255XD

                                   1
                                               4       5
                                                                       6



                                HORN
                                     BILGE
                                                                                7
                           2              3                                        8
                                                                                       9
                                                                                        10
                                                                                        11

                                                                             13

                                                                                   12




                                               20

                                                  18       19                15
                           21
                                                                             16          14


                                                                             17


                        1  “START/STOP” button (page 44)      12 “ACC”1 switch (252SE / 252SD / 255XE /
                        2  “HORN” switch (252XE) (page 77)      255XD) (page 79)
                        3  “BILGE” switch (252XE) (page 77)   13 “NAV LIGHTS” switch (252SE / 252SD /
                                                                255XE / 255XD) (page 79)
                        4  Multi-function display unit (page 79)
                                                              14 Remote control lever (page 44)
                        5  Throttle/shift paddle (252SD / 255XD)
                                                              15 Main switch (page 44)
                        6  Wireless charger (page 130)
                                                              16 Engine shut-off switch (page 41)
                        7  Controller (page 81)
                                                              17 Engine shut-off cord (lanyard) (page 41)
                        8  “HORN” switch (252SE / 252SD / 255XE /
                           255XD) (page 78)                   18 USB charger (page 129)
                        9  “BILGE” switch (252SE / 252SD / 255XE /   19 Aux input (page 97)
                           255XD) (page 78)                   20 Steering wheel (page 46)
                        10 “BLOWER” switch (252SE / 252SD / 255XE /   21 Tilt lever (page 47)
                           255XD) (page 78)
                        11 “ACC”2 switch (252SE / 252SD / 255XE /
                           255XD) (page 79)
                        37]]></page><page Index="47"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 38  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                                                                                Description

                        Engine components
                        1800 cc engine models (3-star)



                                             2             1              2








                              1

                           3    4                                                             4
                                                                                             3


                                                             5



                              6
                                                                6
                                                           7














                        1  Blower (page 159)
                        2  Fuse box (cover) (page 212)
                        3  Air filter case
                        4  Engine cover (page 191)
                        5  Engine oil filler cap (page 145)
                        6  Dipstick (page 145)
                        7  Spark plug/Ignition coil






                                                                                               38]]></page><page Index="48"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 39  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                        Description

                        1800 cc engine models (4-star)



                                            2                         1        2







                            1
                                                                                           3
                            3














                                                        5
                                                                   6    7         4
                               4










                        1  Blower (page 159)
                        2  Fuse box (cover) (page 212)
                        3  Engine oil filler cap (page 145)
                        4  Engine cover (page 191)
                        5  Spark plug/Ignition coil
                        6  Dipstick (page 145)
                        7  Air filter case








                        39]]></page><page Index="49"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 40  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                                                                                Description

                        1900 cc engine models



                                   2                              1           2











                                                                                             3
                           1
                           3                                                                 4

                           6













                              5                                          5





                        1  Blower (page 159)
                        2  Fuse box (cover) (page 212)
                        3  Engine oil filler cap (page 145)
                        4  Spark plug/Ignition coil
                        5  Dipstick (page 145)
                        6  Engine cover (page 191)












                                                                                               40]]></page><page Index="50"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 41  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                        Control function operation

                             Boat control functions           AR250 / SX250 / 252S
                        Engine shut-off switch
                             WARNING
                         Always attach the engine shut-off cord                       1
                          (lanyard) to your PFD before starting the
                          engines. Failure to attach the cord could
                          result in a runaway boat if the operator is           2
                          ejected.
                         Do not attach the cord to clothing that           3
                          could tear loose. Do not route the cord
                          in such a way that it could become en-  1  Engine shut-off switch
                          tangled, preventing it from functioning.   2  Clip
                         Avoid accidentally pulling the cord dur-  3  Engine shut-off cord (lanyard)
                          ing normal operation. Once the engines
                                                              252SE / 252SD / 252XE / 255XE / 255XD
                          have stopped, you have no steering con-
                          trol of the boat which could result in an
                          accident. Also, without  engine power,
                          the boat could slow rapidly from planing                       1
                          speed. This could cause people and ob-
                          jects in the boat to be thrown forward,
                          which could cause injury.                                      2
                        The clip  on the  end of  the engine  shut-off
                        cord (lanyard) must be attached to the engine                    3
                        shut-off switch  for the  engines to run. The
                        cord must be attached to a secure place on  1  Engine shut-off switch
                        the operator’s PFD. Should the operator fall  2  Clip
                        overboard or leave the helm, the cord will pull  3  Engine shut-off cord (lanyard)
                        out the clip, stopping the ignition to the both
                        engines. This will prevent the boat from run-  Batteries and battery switches
                        ning away under power.                Except for 255XE / 255XD: The batteries are
                                                              located in the engine compartment.
                                                              255XE / 255XD: The batteries and switch as-
                                                              sembly are located under the rear port seat.
                                                              This boat uses two marine batteries. One bat-
                                                              tery is designated as the start battery. The
                                                              start battery is connected to the starter cir-
                                                              cuits on both engines to provide current for
                                                              the starter motors.
                                                              The other battery is designated as the house
                                                              battery. The house battery provides power


                        41]]></page><page Index="51"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 42  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                                                         Control function operation

                        for the various accessory circuits on the boat,  Except for 255XE / 255XD
                        such as the circuits for lighting, bilge pump,
                        blowers and audio system.
                        Except for 255XE / 255XD                             2                 3
                                      2
                               1                                    1                          4







                                                              1  Battery switch assembly
                                                              2  “HOUSE” switch (red)
                                                              3  “EMERG PARALLEL” switch (yellow)
                        1  Start battery                      4  “START” switch (red)
                        2  House battery
                                                              255XE / 255XD
                        255XE / 255XD

                                                                     1       2                 3
                                        1     2
                                                                                              4






                                                              1  Battery switch assembly
                                                              2  “HOUSE” switch (red)
                        1  Start battery
                                                              3  “EMERG PARALLEL” switch (yellow)
                        2  House battery
                                                              4  “START” switch (red)
                        The battery switch assembly is located in the
                        rear underseat storage compartment (port).
                        There are three switches  on  the  battery
                        switch assembly: the  “START”  switch,
                        “HOUSE” switch, and “EMERG PARALLEL”
                        switch.










                                                                                               42]]></page><page Index="52"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 43  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                        Control function operation

                                                              Main switches
                                 1           2                (AR250 / SX250 / 252S)
                                                              There is a main switch for each engine.
                                                              The main  switch controls the  ignition  and
                                                              electrical circuits as follows:

                                                                     OFF      START
                                                                          ON


                                                                           HORN
                                                                                  BILGE
                        1  ON position (green)
                        2  OFF position (red)
                                                                        1            2
                        In normal operation, keep the “START” and
                        “HOUSE” switches in the ON position. Keep
                        the “EMERG PARALLEL” switch in the OFF  1  Main switch (port engine)
                        position. This setting allows both batteries to  2  Main switch (starboard engine)
                        be charged automatically while the engines
                        are running.  NOTICE: Do  not turn the  OFF:
                        “HOUSE” switch to the OFF position if the  Ignition  circuit is switched off. The engine
                        boat is moored in the water as it will pre-  cannot be started, but other switches will op-
                        vent the anchor light from functioning.  erate. (The main switch key can be removed.)
                        If the start battery is discharged, turn the  ON:
                        “EMERG PARALLEL” switch to the ON posi-  Ignition  circuit is  switched on. (The main
                        tion to start the engines. Once the engines  switch key cannot be removed.)
                        are started or the start battery is charged,  START:
                        turn the “EMERG PARALLEL” switch to the  The starter motor will turn to start the engine.
                        OFF position.                         (When the main switch key is released, it re-
                                                              turns automatically to “ON”.)
                                                              TIP:
                                                               The engine will not start when the clip is re-
                                                               moved from the engine  shut-off switch.
                                                               The starter motor will turn over without the
                                                               cord attached.
                                                               The main switch will not operate (the starter
                                                               motor will not turn over) if the “START”
                                                               switch on the battery switch assembly is
                                                               turned to the OFF position. (See page 41
                                                               for more information.)





                        43]]></page><page Index="53"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 44  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                                                         Control function operation

                        Main switch (252SE / 252SD / 252XE /
                        255XE / 255XD)
                        The main switch controls the ignition circuit
                        as follows:
                                        ON
                                 OFF


                                                                               1
                                                    1
                                                              1  “START/STOP” button

                                                              TIP:
                                                               The engine will not start when the clip is re-
                        1  Main switch                         moved from the engine shut-off switch.
                                                               The main switch will not operate (the starter
                        OFF:                                   motor will not turn over) if the “START”
                        Ignition circuit is switched off. The engines  switch on the battery switch assembly is
                        cannot be started. (The main switch key can  turned to the OFF position. (See page 41
                        be removed.)                           for more information.)
                        ON:
                        Ignition circuit is switched on. (The main  Remote control levers
                        switch key cannot be removed.)
                                                                  WARNING

                        “START/STOP” buttons                   Before shifting, make sure there are no
                        (252SE / 252SD / 252XE / 255XE /       swimmers or obstacles in the water
                        255XD)                                 near you.
                        The engines can  be  started or stopped by   When operating in reverse, go slowly.
                        pushing the “START/STOP” buttons. It is  Do not open the throttle more than half.
                        possible to start or stop the engines individu-  Otherwise, the boat may become unsta-
                        ally.                                  ble, which could result in loss of control
                         PORT: Port engine                    and an accident.
                         STBD: Starboard engine               Do not shift into reverse while traveling
                                                               at planing speeds. Loss of control, boat
                                                               swamping, or damage to the boat could
                                                               occur.
                                                              The remote control lever for each engine con-
                                                              trols both throttle and shifting. In normal op-
                                                              eration, the levers are moved together.
                                                              Moving the remote control levers  forward
                                                              from the neutral position shifts into the for-


                                                                                               44]]></page><page Index="54"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 45  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                        Control function operation

                        ward position, and then as  the  levers  are  direction of the boat is controlled by the shift
                        moved farther,  accelerates the engines for  gates, which direct the flow of the jet thrust as
                        more thrust. Moving the levers back from the  follows:
                        neutral position shifts into the reverse posi-
                        tion, and then as the levers are moved farther,  Neutral
                        accelerates the engines for more thrust.  The shift gates are dropped down part way
                        AR250 / SX250 / 252S: For cruising, adjust  over the jet thrust nozzles. The neutral posi-
                        the remote control levers so both engines are  tion balances forward and reverse thrust to
                        running at the same engine speed.     help  keep the boat  from moving, although
                        TIP:                                  some movement may occur.
                        Because of the mechanical throttle linkage,
                        the remote control levers may not be exactly
                        even with one another when the engines are  1
                        running at the same engine speed.

                                                                2
                                         N
                               F  2  5   1    5    R
                                3                 4
                             7                        7
                                       6     6
                                                              1  Shift gate
                          8                              8    2  Jet thrust nozzle

                                                              Forward
                                                              When the remote control levers are initially
                                                              moved to the forward position and the boat is
                        1  Neutral position
                                                              operating at a slow speed, the shift gates are
                        2  TDE position
                                                              lifted up slightly from the neutral position and
                        3  Forward position
                                                              jet thrust is directed downward at an angle.
                        4  Reverse position
                        5  Shift                              This function, which is called the thrust direc-
                        6  Fully closed                       tional enhancer (TDE), helps to provide good
                        7  Throttle                           handling response when the steering wheel is
                        8  Fully open                         turned, even though there is less thrust avail-
                                                              able at low engine speeds.
                        TIP:
                        This boat is equipped with a “start-in-gear”
                        protection. The engines will not start unless
                        the levers are in the neutral position.

                        This boat uses a direct-drive propulsion sys-
                        tem. Therefore, jet thrust is always being pro-
                        duced while the engines are running. The


                        45]]></page><page Index="55"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 46  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                                                         Control function operation


                                         N                      1
                               F  1                R



                                                                2






                        1  TDE position                       1  Shift gate
                                                              2  Jet thrust nozzle

                                                              Reverse
                                                              The shift gates are dropped all the way down
                          1
                                                              over the jet thrust nozzles. Jet thrust is redi-
                                                              rected  toward  the bow of the  boat, which
                                                              moves the boat backward.
                          2


                                                                1

                        1  Shift gate
                        2  Jet thrust nozzle

                        When the remote control levers are moved
                        farther forward, the shift gates are lifted all the
                        way up. All  jet thrust is to the  rear,  which
                        moves the boat forward.               1  Shift gate
                                                              Steering
                                                              Your boat can be steered by turning  the
                                                              steering wheel the same direction you wish to
                                                              travel, to the right or left. When the steering
                                                              wheel is turned, the angle  of  the jet thrust
                                                              nozzles at the rear of the craft is changed,
                                                              and the change in direction of the jet thrust
                                                              nozzles changes the direction of the boat ac-
                                                              cordingly.
                                                              Except for 252SD / 255XD: In addition, the di-
                                                              rection of the  articulating keel changes ac-


                                                                                               46]]></page><page Index="56"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 47  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                        Control function operation

                        cording to the movement of the jet thrust  Since the strength of the jet thrust determines
                        nozzles.                              the speed and direction of a turn, the throttle
                        252SD / 255XD: When the DRiVE X mode is  must always be opened above idle when at-
                        activated, the turning range of  the steering  tempting a turn, except at trolling speed.
                        wheel is approximately half the range of when  Because boats steer from the stern, the stern
                        the operator is using the remote control le-  of the boat swings out in the opposite direc-
                        vers (running mode or single lever mode). Al-  tion of your turn. If you turn to starboard, for
                        though the turning range of  the steering  example, the stern of the boat will swing to
                        wheel changes depending on the operation  the left. Keep this in mind when navigating
                        mode, the movement of the jet thrust nozzles  near a person in the water, such as a down
                        is adjusted automatically so that the full range  wakeboarder or water-skier, or an obstacle,
                        of motion for the nozzles matches the turning  such as a dock.
                        range regardless of the selected mode. (See
                        page 87 for  information on each operation  Tilt lever
                        mode.)
                                                                  WARNING
                                                               Never touch the tilt lever during opera-
                                          1                    tion, otherwise the steering wheel could
                                                               suddenly change  position, which may
                                    1     2                    lead to an accident.
                                       2
                                                               Be sure the steering wheel is locked in
                                                               position after adjustment. If the steering
                                                               wheel is not locked in position, it may
                                                               suddenly change position during opera-
                                                               tion, which may lead to an accident.
                        1  Running mode and single lever mode  The tilt lever is located under the steering
                        2  DRiVE X mode (252SD / 255XD)       wheel and is used to adjust the tilt of the
                                                              steering wheel. There are 5 positions.











                              1                     1                           1
                                              2

                        1  Jet thrust nozzle
                                                              1  Tilt lever
                        2  Articulating keel (except for 252SD / 255XD)



                        47]]></page><page Index="57"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 48  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                                                         Control function operation

                        To adjust the tilt:                      tion mode  button on  the multi-function
                        (1) Push the lever down, and then move the  display switch.
                            steering wheel up or down to the desired           1
                            position.
                        (2) The lever will lock into place when the
                            steering wheel is moved into one of the 5
                                                                    NE
                                                                    SW
                                                                                       DEPTH
                            available positions.                                       .8 9  ft
                        (3) Make sure that the tilt lever returns to its
                                                                                     19
                            original  position and that  the steering       x1000 rpm
                            wheel is securely locked in place.
                                                               H
                                                                                    HOUSE
                                                                                9   13.0  V
                        DRiVE X mode (252SD / 255XD)                  Nav  Anchor          2
                        Using the switches equipped on the steering  1  Mode status
                        wheel, you can perform forward, reverse, and  2  Operation mode button
                        sideways movements at low speed without
                        using the remote control levers.      TIP:
                                                              Push and hold the “MODE” switch to enter
                                                              calibration mode.
                          1                             6
                          2                             7     To cancel DRiVE X mode, push the “MODE”
                          3                             8     switch. Push the switch, and there will be two
                          4                             9     beep sounds and the switch will turn off.

                          5                                   Forward
                                                              To move forward, pull the throttle/shift pad-
                                                              dle (right). When the paddle is pulled, the shift
                        1  Throttle/shift paddle (left)       gates of both engines will be in the TDE posi-
                        2  “  ”  switch                       tion, the engine speed will increase, and the
                        3  “   DOCK HOLD” switch              boat will move forward at low speed.
                        4  “PIVOT TURN” switch                When the paddle is released, the shift gates
                        5  “MODE” switch                      return to the  neutral  position and  the boat
                        6  Throttle/shift paddle (right)      idles.
                        7  “  ”  switch
                        8  “   DOCK HOLD” switch
                                                              Reverse
                        9  “HIGH MODE” switch
                                                              To move in reverse, pull the throttle/shift pad-
                                                              dle (left). When the paddle is pulled, the shift
                        To activate DRiVE X mode:
                                                              gates of both engines will be in the reverse
                        (1) Put the remote control levers in the neu-
                                                              position, the engine speed will increase, and
                            tral position.
                                                              the boat will move in reverse at low speed.
                        (2) Push the “MODE” switch, and there will
                            be a single beep sound and the switch
                            will light up. The mode status and opera-
                                                                                               48]]></page><page Index="58"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 49  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                        Control function operation

                        When the paddle is released, the shift gates  Dock hold
                        return to the neutral position and the boat
                                                                  WARNING
                        idles.
                                                              The dock hold function  is an auxiliary
                        Sideways movement                     function for berthing at a dock. The opera-
                        It is possible to move the boat sideways with-  tor  should  not leave the driver's seat in
                        out changing the direction of the bow.  case the dock hold function is unexpect-
                        To move sideways to the right, continuously  edly disengaged due to the effects of the
                        push the “  ” switch, and to move sideways  wind or the tide.
                        to the left, continuously  push the  “  ”
                                                              It is possible to  continue  moving  the boat
                        switch.
                                                              sideways without changing the direction of
                        When the  switch  is released, the boat will
                                                              the bow.
                        stop.
                                                              To move sideways to  the right, push the
                                                              “   DOCK HOLD” switch,  and to move
                                                              sideways to the left,  push the “   DOCK
                                                              HOLD” switch.
                                                              When the switch is pushed, there will be a
                                                              single beep sound, and the switch will blink.























                        TIP:
                        While the switch is being pushed continuous-
                        ly, the movement of the boat can be adjusted
                        by operating the steering  wheel or throt-
                        tle/shift paddle.






                        49]]></page><page Index="59"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 50  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                                                         Control function operation

                        To move forward or in reverse during DOCK  To cancel the  operation, push the  “PIVOT
                        HOLD operation, pull the throttle/shift pad-  TURN” switch again.  When the  switch is
                        dle.                                  pushed, there will be two beep sounds, and
                        TIP:                                  the switch will turn off.
                        Forward and reverse movement can be ad-
                        justed in 3 steps.                    High mode
                                                              During DRiVE X mode operation, it is possible
                        To cancel the  operation, push  the switch  to increase the speed to a speed that is high-
                        again. When the switch is pushed, there will  er than normal speed.
                        be two beep sounds, and the switch will turn  To increase the  speed, push the “HIGH
                        off.                                  MODE” switch. When the switch is pushed,
                                                              there will be a single beep sound, and the
                        Pivot turn                            switch will light up.
                        It is possible to turn the boat while holding the  HIGH MODE is  applicable to the following
                        boat’s position.                      functions.
                        To turn the boat, push  the  “PIVOT TURN”   Sideways movement
                        switch. To turn the boat to the right, turn the   Dock hold
                        steering wheel right, and to turn the boat to   Pivot turn
                        the left, turn the steering wheel left. When the
                        switch is pushed, there will be a single beep  To cancel  the operation, push  the “HIGH
                        sound, and the switch will light up.  MODE” switch  again. When the  switch is
                                                              pushed, there will be two beep sounds, and
                                                              the switch will turn off.

                                                              Sideways movement calibration
                                                              If the boat does not move to the side during
                                                              sideways movement, you can adjust the op-
                                                              eration so that the boat moves to the side.

                                                              To perform sideways movement calibration:
                                                              (1) Put the boat in normal mode.
                                                              (2) Push and hold the “MODE” switch until
                                                                 “DRiVE X calibration mode” appears on
                                                                 the multi-function display.













                                                                                               50]]></page><page Index="60"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 51  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                        Control function operation



                                                                      NW       N       NE







                                                                              MPH
                                DRiVE X calibration mode          DRiVE X calibration is successful

                        (3) Push the “HIGH MODE” switch, and se-  TIP:
                            lect the engine speed.            Calibration requires adjustment of each com-
                        (4) Push the switch of the function you want  bination of engine speed and switch for the
                            to adjust.                        sideways movement function.


                                                              To reset the adjustments:
                                                              (1) Put the boat in normal mode.
                          1                             3     (2) Push and hold the “MODE” switch until
                                                                 “DRiVE X calibration mode” appears on
                          2                             4
                                                                 the multi-function display.
                                                              (3) When the “MODE” switch is pushed,
                                                                 “DRiVE X calibration data reset” is dis-
                                                                 played, and the boat returns to normal
                                                                 mode.
                        1  “  ”  switch
                        2  “   DOCK HOLD” switch                      NW       N       NE
                        3  “  ”  switch
                        4  “   DOCK HOLD” switch
                        (5) When the boat starts moving, operate
                            the steering wheel and throttle/shift pad-
                            dle so that the boat starts moving to the         MPH
                            side.
                                                                   DRiVE X calibration data reset
                        (6) When the “MODE” switch is pushed,
                            “DRiVE X calibration is successful” is
                            displayed, and the boat returns to normal
                            mode.








                        51]]></page><page Index="61"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 52  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                                                                 Instrument operation

                                           Helm controls (AR250 / SX250)



                               1     2


                                                       3
                               HORN
                                    BILGE                             4


                                                                                5




                                                                                  6       7












                        1  “HORN” switch
                        2  “BILGE” switch
                        3  Multi-function display unit
                        4  Wireless charger
                        5  Controller
                        6  USB charger
                        7  Aux input



















                                                                                               52]]></page><page Index="62"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 53  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                        Instrument operation

                        Switch panel                             Multi-function display unit
                        In addition to touching the multi-function dis-   operation
                        play directly, you can use the switches to op-
                                                              Because the multi-function display unit is
                        erate various functions.
                                                              equipped with a touch screen, you can touch
                                     1      2                 the display directly to operate the display
                                                              functions.
                                                              In addition to touching the display, you can
                                                              use the joystick to operate the display func-
                                     HORN
                                            BILGE
                                                              tions.
                                                              Touching the multi-function display




                        1  “HORN” switch                                 NW   N   NE
                                                                 FUEL                   DEPTH
                        2  “BILGE” switch                        50  %     FLOAT MODE   0  Ft
                                                                                °F
                        “HORN” switch                                      Water Temp
                        Activates the horn. The horn can be used to  START  V          HOUSE  V
                                                                                       11.8
                                                                   11.8
                        signal other boats as required by the “Rules  Bilge  Blower  Nav  Anchor
                        of the road”. (See page 21.)
                        The switch light comes on while the horn is
                        operating.
                                                              Using the joystick
                        “BILGE” switch                        This joystick has the following two operation
                        Turns the bilge pump on or off. (See page  modes.
                        148.)                                  Volume control mode
                        The switch light comes on while the bilge   Navigation control mode
                        pump is operating.                    Push the  “VOLUME–(SCROLL)” button to
                        TIP:                                  switch the operation mode.
                        Even if the bilge pump is turned off, the pump
                                                                               1
                        will operate every 2 minutes when the house
                        battery switch is in the on position.
                                                                              VOLUME
                                                                              (SCROLL)
                                                                           HOME   CANCEL



                                                                            CRUISE  CRUISE
                                                                            NO WAKE  NO WAKE


                                                              1  “VOLUME–(SCROLL)” button


                        53]]></page><page Index="63"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 54  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                                                                 Instrument operation

                        Volume control mode
                        Turn the joystick knob to change the audio
                        volume.
                                                                              VOLUME
                                                                              (SCROLL)
                                                                           HOME   CANCEL
                                         VOLUME
                                         (SCROLL)
                                      HOME  CANCEL
                                                                            CRUISE  CRUISE
                                                                            NO WAKE  NO WAKE
                                                 1
                                       CRUISE  CRUISE
                                       NO WAKE  NO WAKE
                                                              TIP:
                                                              Although the procedures in this manual ex-
                        1  Joystick knob                      plain how to make selections by touching the
                                                              display, you can also make selections using
                        Navigation control mode               the joystick knob.
                        (1) Turn the joystick knob to change the se-
                            lected setting or item.



                                         VOLUME
                                         (SCROLL)
                                      HOME  CANCEL
                                                 1


                                       CRUISE  CRUISE
                                       NO WAKE  NO WAKE

                        1  Joystick knob
                        (2) Push the joystick knob to select an item
                            or confirm a setting.
















                                                                                               54]]></page><page Index="64"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 55  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                        Instrument operation

                                Operation buttons             Operating the boat at a steady speed
                        In addition to touching the multi-function dis-  (cruise assist)
                        play directly, you can use the operation but-  The cruise assist feature is for steady engine
                        tons and the controller to operate  various  speed operation when the boat is traveling
                        functions.                            above no-wake speeds. The cruise assist is
                                                              available for use whenever the engines are
                        Controller                            running above 3000 rpm and  below  7000
                                                              rpm.
                                      1  2 3                  To activate the cruise assist:
                                                              (1) Push the remote control levers forward
                                         VOLUME
                                         (SCROLL)                to open the throttle until the desired en-
                                      HOME  CANCEL
                                                                 gine speed is reached and both engines
                                                                 are operating at the same engine speed.
                                                              (2) Push the “CRUISE/NO WAKE” (+) button
                                                                 or “CRUISE/NO WAKE” (–) button. When
                                       CRUISE  CRUISE
                                       NO WAKE  NO WAKE
                                                                 the cruise assist is activated, “CRUISE
                                       4   5                     ASSIST” and  the cruise assist setting
                                                                 level will be displayed  under  the  boat
                                Name           Function
                                                                 speed.
                         1  “HOME” button  Displays the home
                                          screen. (See page 88.)
                                                                       SE      S      SW
                         2  “VOLUME  –    Switches the joystick
                            (SCROLL)” but-  between the volume
                            ton           control mode and the
                                          navigation control
                                          mode. When the main
                                          switches are turned to
                                          the on position, the                MPH
                                          volume control mode
                                          is selected by default.         CRUISE ASSIST:
                         3  “CANCEL” but-  Deselects the current-
                            ton           ly selected item.                         1
                         4  “CRUISE/NO    Activate and set the   1  Cruise assist setting level
                            WAKE” (–) but-  cruise assist, no-wake
                            ton           mode, and reverse
                         5  “CRUISE/NO    RPM control. (See the    Once the cruise assist is activated, the set
                            WAKE” (+) but-  following sections.)  engine speed can be increased by pushing
                            ton                                the “CRUISE/NO WAKE” (+) button or de-
                                                               creased by  pushing the  “CRUISE/NO
                                                               WAKE” (–)  button. However, the  adjust-
                                                               ment is limited to a maximum of 8 incre-
                                                               ments above or below the initial cruise
                                                               assist setting. Each time a button is
                                                               pushed, the engine speed will increase or
                                                               decrease approximately 100–200 rpm.


                        55]]></page><page Index="65"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 56  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                                                                 Instrument operation

                         While the cruise assist is activated, the en-  The no-wake mode can be set to 3 engine
                          gine speed can also be adjusted by operat-  speeds. To adjust the engine speed while the
                          ing the remote control levers.      no-wake  mode is activated, push the
                                                              “CRUISE/NO   WAKE”   (+)  button  or
                        To deactivate the cruise assist:      “CRUISE/NO WAKE” (–) button.
                        Operate the remote control  levers  to de-  To deactivate the no-wake mode:
                        crease the engine speed to 3000 rpm or less.  Perform one of the following operations.
                        When “Cruise” and the cruise assist setting   Push  the “CRUISE/NO WAKE” (–) button
                        level disappear, the cruise assist is deactivat-  repeatedly until “No Wake” disappears.
                        ed.                                    Push the remote control levers forward to
                                                               open the throttle.
                        Operating the boat with a minimal
                        wake (no-wake mode)                   Operating the boat in reverse with
                        The no-wake mode is useful for operating the  more thrust (reverse RPM control)
                        boat at a steady speed with a minimal wake.  Engine speed in reverse is limited to approx-
                        This is especially convenient when traveling  imately 4500 rpm. If more thrust is required
                        in harbors, channels, or other areas posted  when the boat is traveling in reverse, use the
                        with low speed limits as “no wake zones”.  reverse RPM control.  WARNING! Be  pre-
                        The no-wake mode can be used only when  pared to  reduce throttle as  soon as the
                        the engines are operating at idle speed.  boat moves as desired.  Otherwise, the
                        To activate the no-wake mode:         boat may become unstable, which could
                        (1) Put the remote control levers in the TDE  result in loss of control and an accident.
                            position or forward position so that both  To activate the reverse RPM control:
                            engines are operating at idle speed.  (1) Move the remote control levers  back-
                        (2) Push the  “CRUISE/NO WAKE” (+) but-  ward so that the throttle is opened in re-
                            ton. When the no-wake mode is activat-  verse and both engines are operating at
                            ed, “No Wake” and the no-wake mode   the same engine speed.
                            setting level will be displayed under the  (2) Increase the engine speed to 4500 rpm,
                            boat speed.                          and then push the “CRUISE/NO WAKE”
                                                                 (+) button.
                                  SE      S      SW
                                                              Once the reverse RPM control is activated,
                                                              pushing the “CRUISE/NO WAKE” (+) button
                                                              will increase the  available  engine speed by
                                                              approximately 500 rpm in 3 stages up to a
                                                              maximum of 6000 rpm, and pushing the
                                         MPH                  “CRUISE/NO WAKE” (–) button will decrease
                                      No Wake:                the available engine speed. However, the ad-
                                                              justment is limited to these 3 increments.
                                            1
                        1  No-wake mode setting level




                                                                                               56]]></page><page Index="66"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 57  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                        Instrument operation

                        To deactivate the reverse RPM control:
                        Operate the remote control  levers  to de-
                        crease the engine speed to less than 4500
                        rpm.


























































                        57]]></page><page Index="67"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 58  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                                                                 Instrument operation

                                           Multi-function display elements




                                              1             2             1




                                                     NW      N      NE
                                         FUEL                                 DEPTH
                                        50  %           FLOAT MODE            0  Ft

                                                                 °F
                                                         Water Temp
                                           START                            HOUSE
                                           11.8  V                          11.8  V
                                           Bilge  Blower              Nav  Anchor

                                                            4    3



                        1  Static bar                         3  Center display
                        2  Screen tab bar                     4  Status indicator bar






























                                                                                               58]]></page><page Index="68"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 59  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                        Instrument operation

                        Static bar





                                                        NW       NE
                                        FUEL                                  DEPTH
                                 1                                                     4
                                        50  %                                 0  Ft
                                                                                       5
                                 2                                                     6




                                 3                                                     7
                                            START                          HOUSE
                                            11.8  V                        11.8  V
                                           Bilge  Blower            Nav   Anchor



                                    Name                             Function
                          1  Fuel level bar graph  Displays the amount of fuel remaining in the fuel tank. Depending
                                                 on the amount of remaining fuel, the bar graph is displayed in 3
                                                 colors: blue, orange, and red.
                          2  Port engine tachometer  Displays the engine speed.
                          3  Start battery voltage val-  Displays the start battery voltage in a numerical format.
                             ue
                          4  Depth level         Displays the water depth in feet or meters. Depending on the wa-
                                                 ter depth, the bar graph is displayed in 3 colors: blue, orange, and
                                                 red.
                          5  Day/Night brightness  Switches between day brightness and night brightness. (See page
                                                 72.)
                          6  Starboard engine ta-  Displays the engine speed.
                             chometer
                          7  House battery voltage   Displays the house battery voltage in a numerical format.
                             value















                        59]]></page><page Index="69"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 60  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                                                                 Instrument operation

                        Center display


                                                  NW         N        NE

                                                       FLOAT MODE


                                                                   °F
                                                        Water Temp
                                                                            1



                                    Name                             Function
                          1  Center display      Displays various information for each screen tab.

                        Screen tab bar
                                     1      2     3     4      5      6     7      8








                                    Name                             Function
                          1  Clock               Displays the time. Tap the clock to set the time. (See page 71.)
                          2  Home screen tab     Displays the home screen. (See page 62.)
                          3  Map screen tab      Displays the map screen. (See page 62.)
                          4  Trip screen tab     Displays the trip screen. (See page 66.)
                          5  Media screen tab    Displays the media screen. (See page 67.)
                          6  System control screen   Displays the system control screen. (See page 70.)
                             tab
                          7  Setting screen tab  Displays the setting screen. (See page 71.)
                          8  Warning mute button  Mutes the sound of the buzzer for a specific time depending on
                                                 the warnings present.













                                                                                               60]]></page><page Index="70"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 61  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                        Instrument operation

                        Status indicator bar


                                      1       2             3             4       5

                                     Bilge  Blower                       Nav    Anchor



                                    Name                             Function
                          1  Bilge pump indicator  Indicates the operation setting of the bilge pump. When the bilge
                                                 pump is turned off, the indicator will be gray, and when the bilge
                                                 pump is turned on, the indicator will be blue.
                                                 You can also tap this indicator to change the bilge pump setting.
                          2  Blower indicator    Displays the operating status of the blowers. When the main
                                                 switches are turned to the on position, a 5-minute timer will be
                                                 displayed in this indicator while the blowers operate automatically.
                                                 You can also tap this indicator to turn the blowers on or off.
                          3  Warning icon bar    Displays the warning icons.
                                                 When a warning icon is displayed, tap the icon to display the
                                                 warning message for that icon.
                          4  Navigation light indicator  Displays the operating status of the navigation light mode. (When
                                                 the navigation light mode is activated, the bow light and anchor
                                                 light are turned on.)
                                                 You can also tap this indicator to turn the navigation light mode on
                                                 or off.
                          5  Anchor light indicator  Displays the operating status of the anchor light mode. (When the
                                                 anchor light mode is activated, only the anchor light is turned on.)
                                                 You can also tap this indicator to turn the anchor light mode on or
                                                 off.


























                        61]]></page><page Index="71"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 62  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                                                                 Instrument operation

                                  Home screen                            Map screen
                        This screen displays the boat speed, current  This screen displays a map.
                        heading of the boat, and other information.

                         1        NW      N       NE

                                    RUNNING MODE

                         2
                                        MPH
                                                                                 MPH
                         3

                                                                   Item            Function
                                Name           Function                      Shows the direction of
                         1  Heading       Displays the heading               North at the top of the
                                          of the boat.                       screen, or the current
                                                                             course being traveled at
                         2  Boat speed*   Displays the boat                  the top of the screen.
                                          speed in miles per
                                          hour or kilometers per
                                          hour.                              Zooms out to display a
                         3  Cruise  as-   Displays the operating             more distant view of the
                            sist/no-wake   status of the cruise as-          map.
                            mode status in-  sist and no-wake                Zooms in to display a clos-
                            dicator       mode.                              er view of the map.
                                          When the cruise assist
                                          is activated, “CRUISE
                                          ASSIST” and the                    Opens the waypoint menu.
                                          cruise assist setting
                                          level will be displayed.
                                          When the no-wake
                                          mode is activated, “No             Opens the track menu.
                                          Wake” and no-wake
                                          mode setting level will
                                          be displayed.                      Displays the Map Settings.
                        * When both engines are not running, the wa-
                          ter temperature will be displayed.














                                                                                               62]]></page><page Index="72"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 63  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                        Instrument operation

                        Waypoint                              (3) Select  the  waypoint you want to use
                        Set a waypoint for a destination on the map.  from the list and tap “Go-To”.
                        Waypoints can be attached to any location.
                                                                          Waypoint Manager

                                      Waypoints                         AAD           EDIT
                                                                       Lat:       34.6892
                                                                       Lon:       137.5789
                                                                       Distance:    0.62 Ft.

                               Go-To        Add Waypoint          Close   Delete  View    Go-To
                                                                                           1
                                 1               2            1  “Go-To”
                        1  “Go-To”
                        2  “Add Waypoint”                     Track
                                                              Set the track and display the route on the
                        To add a Waypoint:                    map.
                        (1) Tap “   ” to open the waypoint menu.
                        (2) Tap “Add Waypoint”.
                                                                             Tracks
                        (3) Enter the name of the waypoint and tap
                            “Save”.
                                                                                           REC
                                      Add Waypoint
                                                                  Follow    Create Track  Record
                                          A   B
                                                                    1          2          3
                                     A    B   C
                                     B    C   D
                                                              1  “Follow”
                            Cancel                   Save     2  “Create Track”
                                                              3  “Record”
                                                     1
                                                              To create a track:
                        1  “Save”
                                                              (1) Tap “  ” to open the track menu.
                        TIP:                                  (2) Tap “Create Track”.
                        Check the registered waypoint information  (3) Create a route on the map and tap “Do-
                        with the waypoint manager. (See page 91)  ne”.

                        Cruising to the destination:
                        (1) Tap “   ” to open the waypoint menu.
                        (2) Tap “Go-To”.




                        63]]></page><page Index="73"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 64  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                                                                 Instrument operation

                        (4) Enter the name of the track and  tap  (4) Tap “  ” and then tap “Stop”.
                            “Save”.
                                       Add Track                             Tracks

                                                                      Stop Recording Track?
                                          A   B
                                     A    B   C
                                                                   No                    Stop
                                     B    C   D
                                                                                          1
                            Cancel                   Save
                                                     1
                                                              1  “Stop”
                        1  “Save”
                                                              (5) Tap “Save”
                        TIP:
                                                                           Track Manager
                        Check the registered track information with
                        the track manager. (See page 91)             EGG   Save Track?
                                                                     Temp
                        To follow a track:
                        (1) Tap “   ” to open the track menu.        AMA
                        (2) Tap “Follow”.
                        (3) Select the track you want to use from the
                                                                Do Not Save               Save
                            list and tap “Follow”.
                                                                                           1
                                     Track Manager
                                                              1  “Save”
                                   EAC           EDIT
                                                              (6) Enter  the name of the track and  tap
                                  Distance:    2651.68 ft
                                                                 “Save”.

                                                              Map settings screen
                                                              Perform settings for waypoints and  tracks,
                            Close   Delete   Hide    Follow
                                                              etc. on the Map Settings screen.
                                                     1
                        1  “Follow”
                        To record a track:
                        (1) Tap “   ” to open the track menu.
                        (2) Tap “Record”.
                        (3) Navigating the route registered as a truck
                            by boat.




                                                                                               64]]></page><page Index="74"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 65  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                        Instrument operation

                        Waypoints                                  Item            Function
                        Perform waypoint management. Tap “Way-              Changes the color of the
                        points” to display “Waypoint Manager”.              waypoint.

                                                              EDIT          Changes the name of the
                                     Waypoint Manager
                                                                            waypoint.
                                   AAD           EDIT         Delete        Deletes the waypoint.
                                                              Show / Hide   Shows the track on the
                                  Lat:       34.6892                        map. Hide will make that
                                                                            track invisible.
                                  Lon:       137.5789
                                  Distance:    0.62 Ft.       Follow        Display the route of the
                                                                            track on the map and start
                                                                            navigating.
                            Close   Delete   View    Go-To
                                                              Satellite status
                             Item            Function
                                                              Display detectable satellites.
                                       Changes the color of the
                                       waypoint.
                                                                     Satellite Status  N
                         EDIT          Changes the name of the    SATELLITES     3
                                       waypoint.                  9:47
                                                                  Latitude:  35.6060
                         Delete        Deletes the waypoint.      Longitude:  -84.2541
                                                                  Op Mode:  0.00  W         E
                         View          Views the waypoint on the   HDOP:  0.00
                                                                  VDOP:  0.00
                                       map.
                                                                  TDOP:  0.00
                                                                  SOG:  0.0
                         Go-To         Displays the route to the
                                                                  COG:  0
                                       waypoint on the map.                          S
                                                                 Close
                        Tracks
                        Perform track management. Tap “Tracks” to
                        display “Track Manager”.              Depth / Position
                                                              Perform settings  for contour lines and  safe
                                                              depths.
                                     Track Manager
                                   EAC           EDIT
                                                                           Depth / Position
                                  Distance:    2651.68 ft
                                                                  DEPTH CONTOUR
                                                                    All  66ft  33ft  16ft  6ft  0ft
                                                                  SAFETY CONTOUR
                            Close   Delete   Hide    Follow         66ft  33ft  16ft  6ft  0ft
                                                                 Close






                        65]]></page><page Index="75"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 66  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                                                                 Instrument operation

                        To perform settings, select the desired depth.   Trip screen
                        Set depths are reflected on the map.  This screen displays the hours of engine op-
                                                              eration, fuel consumption, and other informa-
                        Chart Setup                           tion.
                        Perform settings for functions displayed on
                        the map.                                              1            2 3
                                                                      NW       N        NE
                                                                     Economy :
                                       Chart Setup                                0.0 MPG
                                                                    Trip Distance:  0.0 Mi
                               SHOW GRIDS     SHOW  TRACKS
                                                                     Fuel Used :  0.0 Gal
                               SHOW TEXT      SHOW NAV AIDS
                                                                     Fuel Flow :  0.0 GPH
                               SHOW WAYPOINTS  SHOW WAYPOINT NAMES
                                                                                          Reset All
                            Close
                                                              1  Menu
                                                              2  Scrollbar
                                                              3  “Reset All” button
                        To perform settings, select the item you want
                        to display.                           The menu displays the following items. Scroll
                                                              through the menu items using the scrollbar.
                                                                  Name             Function
                                                              Economy       Shows the average dis-
                                                                            tance that can be traveled
                                                                            on 1.0 gallon or 1.0 liter of
                                                                            fuel. When gallons are se-
                                                                            lected for the display units,
                                                                            the value is shown in miles
                                                                            and when liters are selected
                                                                            for the display units, the
                                                                            value is shown in kilome-
                                                                            ters.
                                                              Trip Distance  Shows the distance trav-
                                                                            eled by the boat in miles or
                                                                            kilometers since the item
                                                                            was last reset.
                                                              Fuel Used     Shows the total fuel that
                                                                            has been consumed by the
                                                                            port and starboard engines
                                                                            in gallons or liters.
                                                              Fuel Flow*    Shows the total fuel con-
                                                                            sumption of the port and
                                                                            starboard engines in gal-
                                                                            lons per hour or liters per
                                                                            hour.




                                                                                               66]]></page><page Index="76"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 67  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                        Instrument operation


                             Name            Function                   Media screen
                         Water         Shows the ambient water   This screen can be used to receive a radio
                         Temperature*  temperature in degrees   broadcast, connect to an external device us-
                                       Fahrenheit or degrees Cel-
                                       sius.                  ing Bluetooth wireless technology, and per-
                         Average Speed  Shows the average boat   form other functions.
                                       speed in miles per hour or
                                       kilometers per hour.
                         Highest Speed  Shows the highest speed of           Source
                                       the boat in miles per hour or
                                       kilometers per hour.            AM Radio    FM Radio
                         Port Engine   Shows the total number of
                         Hours*        hours that the port engine      Weather     Bluetooth
                                       has been running since the
                                       boat was new.                         Auxiliary
                         Starboard     Shows the total number of
                         Engine Hours*  hours that the starboard en-
                                       gine has been running since   Turn Off  Select a Source  Zone Control
                                       the boat was new.
                        * This item cannot be reset.               Item            Function
                                                              AM Radio       Switches the source to the
                                                                             AM radio tuner and dis-
                        To reset an item on the trip screen:                 plays the AM radio screen.
                        Touch and hold the “  ” of the item that  FM Radio   Switches the source to the
                        you want to reset for several seconds.               FM radio tuner and dis-
                                                                             plays the FM radio screen.
                        To reset all of the display items:    Weather        Switches the source to the
                                                                             weather radio tuner and
                        Touch the “Reset All” button to reset all of the     displays the weather radio
                        items.                                               screen.
                                                              Bluetooth      Switches the source to an
                                                                             external device connected
                                                                             using Bluetooth wireless
                                                                             technology, and displays
                                                                             the Bluetooth screen.
                                                              Auxiliary      Switches the source to the
                                                                             auxiliary device and dis-
                                                                             plays the auxiliary screen.
                                                              Turn Off       Turns the audio system on
                                                                             or off.
                                                              Zone Control   Displays the volume ad-
                                                                             justment screen for each
                                                                             zone.
                                                              TIP:
                                                              If multiple external devices are connected at
                                                              the same time, the audio system may not op-
                                                              erate properly. When switching from one ex-
                                                              ternal device to another one, disconnect the


                        67]]></page><page Index="77"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 68  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                                                                 Instrument operation

                        currently  connected device,  and then con-  Item          Function
                        nect the other device.                               Increases the radio station
                                                                             frequency. Touch and hold
                                                                             this button to automatically
                        To change the volume:
                                                                             seek the next available ra-
                        The following slider is displayed in each            dio station.
                        screen.                               Source         Displays the media screen.
                        Use the slider control to change the volume.

                                         1                    To change the radio station frequency:
                                                              Tap “   ” or “  ” to tune to a receivable
                                                              frequency.

                        1  Slider control                     To save a radio station frequency to a preset
                                                              button:
                        TIP:                                  Tune the radio to the desired radio station,
                        The volume can also be adjusted by tapping  and then touch and hold the desired preset
                        the “   ” or “  ” button.             button for several seconds.

                        Radio screen (AM/FM)                                   1
                        You can receive a radio broadcast.             AM Radio       AM-1
                                                                   1    2    3    4    5
                                                                    1710
                                  AM Radio      AM-1                           P1
                              1    2    3    4    5
                               1710
                                                                           1710 kHz
                                          P1
                                      1710 kHz
                                                                 Source           MPH    Zone Control
                                                              1  Preset button
                            Source           MPH   Zone Control
                                                              Weather screen
                                                              You can receive a weather broadcast.
                              Item            Function
                                       Decreases the radio sta-
                                       tion frequency. Touch and
                                       hold this button to auto-        NOAA National Weather
                                       matically seek the next
                                       available radio station.
                                                                        CH 1 -0.000 kHz
                                       Decreases the radio sta-
                                       tion frequency.
                                                                   1   2   3   4   5   6   7
                                       Increases the radio station
                                       frequency.
                                                                 Source           MPH    Zone Control




                                                                                               68]]></page><page Index="78"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 69  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                        Instrument operation

                        To change the radio station, tap a preset but-  (3) Tap the “Connect” button, and the “Con-
                        ton.                                     firm Pairing on Device”  screen is  dis-
                                                                 played.
                        Bluetooth screen                      (4) Select “OK” for both the multi-function
                        Smartphones and other external devices that  display unit and the external device.
                        are compatible with Bluetooth can be con-
                        nected wirelessly to the audio system to lis-  To disconnect an external device, turn off the
                        ten to the audio tracks stored on the devices  Bluetooth function of the external device.
                        through the audio system’s speakers.
                                                              Auxiliary screen
                                                              Portable media players  and other external
                                 Bluetooth
                                                              devices can be connected to the audio sys-
                                      Best Of You             tem to listen to the audio tracks stored on the
                                      Foo Fighters
                                      In Your Honor           devices through the audio system’s speak-
                                                              ers.

                                                                             Auxiliary
                           Source            MPH   Zone Control

                              Item            Function
                                       Displays the external de-
                                       vice management screen.

                                       Displays information about   Source        MPH    Zone Control
                                       the current audio track.



                        To connect an external device:
                        (1) Tap the “  ” button, and then select
                            “+Add Device”.
                        (2) Turn on the Bluetooth function of the ex-
                                                                                            1
                            ternal device, and  then search for  the
                            multi-function display unit of the boat.
                        TIP:
                        Make sure that other external devices have
                        their Bluetooth function disabled before be-  1  Auxiliary input jack
                        ginning the pairing  process to reduce  con-
                        nection issues.                       TIP:
                                                               You can adjust the volume level of  the
                                                               speakers using the multi-function display



                        69]]></page><page Index="79"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 70  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                                                                 Instrument operation

                          unit or the volume control of the external  System control screen
                          device.                             The system control screen can be used to
                         To select the audio tracks, use the external  turn the boat lights on and off.
                          device.                             When a light is turned on, it will be indicated
                                                              on the illustration of the boat shown on the
                        Zone control screen                   screen.
                        Perform volume adjustment for each zone.


                                      Zone Control

                                      100
                                100     100   100




                                                                  Courtesy
                            Back    Selected Zone: Interior

                                                                   Item            Function
                        To adjust the volume:                 Courtesy       Turns the courtesy lights
                        (1) Tap the highlighted part.                        on or off. (See page 31 for
                                                                             information on the location
                        (2) Adjust by moving the slider control to the
                                                                             of the courtesy lights.)
                            left or right.
                        (3) Tap “Back”.
                        TIP:                                  To adjust the brightness of the lights:
                        Zones that can be set differ depending on the  Tap the item you want to adjust the bright-
                        specifications.                       ness for, and move the slider control left or
                                                              right to adjust.

                                                                               1



                                                              1  Slider control

                                                              TIP:
                                                              The brightness can also be adjusted by tap-
                                                              ping the “   ” or “    ” button.









                                                                                               70]]></page><page Index="80"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 71  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                        Instrument operation

                                  Setting screen              Time setting screen
                        The setting screen can be used to change the  Perform settings related to the time.
                        settings of the multi-function display unit.
                                                                              Time

                                        Menu                         12-Hour:    24-Hour:
                                  Time         Depth
                                                                     GMT Offset:    -4
                                  Unit       Brightness
                                                                   Daylight Saving Time:  Disabled
                                 Wellness     Language
                               Tuner Region  Auto Volume
                                                                 Back
                                                     Reset
                                                              To set the time:
                                                              (1) Select a 12 hour display or 24 hour dis-
                              Item            Function
                                                                 play.
                         Time          Displays the time setting
                                       screen.                (2) Tap “  ” or “  ” to adjust GMT off-
                         Depth         Displays the depth alarm   set.
                                       setting screen.        (3) Select to enable or disable daylight sav-
                         Unit          Displays the unit setting   ing time.
                                       screen.
                         Brightness    Displays the brightness
                                       setting screen.        Depth alarm setting screen
                                                              The water depth for the depth alarm can be
                         Wellness      Displays the maintenance
                                       setting screen.        set.
                         Language      Displays the language set-
                                       ting screen.                        Set Depth Alarm
                         Tuner Region  Displays the tuner region
                                       setting screen.
                         Auto Volume   Displays the auto volume               5.0 Ft
                                       setting screen.
                         Reset         Displays the factory reset
                                       screen.
                                                                 Back
                                                                               1
                                                              1  Slider control

                                                              To adjust the water depth setting:
                                                              (1) Move the slider control left or right.
                                                              TIP:
                                                               The water depth can also be adjusted by
                                                               tapping the “  ” or “  ” button.



                        71]]></page><page Index="81"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 72  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                                                                 Instrument operation

                         If the water depth is set to 0.0 m (0.0 ft), the
                          depth alarm will not operate.                        1

                        (2) Tap “Back” to complete the setting.
                                                              1  Slider control
                        Unit setting screen
                        The display units for the multi-function dis-  TIP:
                        play unit can be changed.             The brightness can also be adjusted by tap-
                                                              ping the “   ” or “    ” button.
                                        Set Unit
                                                              (3) Tap “Back”.
                                       U.S. Std
                                                              Maintenance setting screen
                                U.S. Std        Metric
                                                              This screen displays the number of hours that
                                                              the engines have been running since the last
                                                              maintenance.
                            Back
                                                                       Time Since Last Maintenance
                        Select “U.S. Std” or “Metric”.             Port Engine          0  Hrs

                        Brightness setting screen                  Starboard Engine     0  Hrs
                        The multi-function  display has a day mode
                        and a night mode.
                        The brightness can be set separately for the  Back                Reset
                        day mode and for the night mode.
                                                              After maintenance  is performed, reset  the
                                      Set Brightness          number of hours of operation as follows.

                                  Night:    30  Day:    90    To reset the number of hours of operation:
                                                              (1) Tap the “Reset” button.
                                                              (2) When the confirmation message ap-
                                                                 pears, tap the “YES” button to reset the
                                                                 number of hours of operation.
                            Back
                                                              TIP:
                                                              To return to the maintenance setting screen
                        To set the brightness:                without  resetting the number of hours, tap
                        (1) Set either “Night” or “Day”.      the “NO” button.
                        (2) Move the slider control left or right to ad-
                            just.


                                                                                               72]]></page><page Index="82"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 73  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                        Instrument operation

                        Language setting screen
                        The language for the  multi-function  display    Auto Volume Settings
                        unit can be changed.
                                                                   Auto Volume Status:  Off
                                      Set Language
                                                                      Intensity:    1
                                  English     Espanol

                                                                 Back
                                        Francais
                                                              To turn on or off the auto volume, tap “Off”.
                            Back                              To control the intensity of auto volume, tap
                                                              the up and down arrows.
                        To change the language, tap the desired lan-  To return to the menu screen, tap “Back”.
                        guage.
                                                              Factory reset screen
                        Tuner Region setting screen           This screen can be set to the factory settings.
                        Set the region in which the multi-function dis-
                        play unit will be used.
                                                                     Are you sure you would like to reset to
                                                                           factory settings?
                                      Tuner Region
                                                                        You cannot undo this action!
                                North America  South America


                                  Japan       Taiwan
                                                                 Cancel                   Conﬁrm
                            Back                              To reset to the factory setting:
                                                              (1) Tap “Confirm”.
                        To change the tuner region, tap the desired  (2) When the confirmation message ap-
                        region.                                  pears, tap the “YES” button.
                        Auto Volume setting screen
                        Auto Volume  will automatically  control the
                        level of volume when overcoming wind or en-
                        gine noise.









                        73]]></page><page Index="83"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 74  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                                                                 Instrument operation

                                                       Warnings
                        If a malfunction or fault occurs, a warning buzzer will sound and a warning icon and warning
                        message will be displayed on the center display.
                        If the displayed warning message includes instructions, follow those instructions. If you have
                        any questions, consult a Yamaha Boat Dealer.



                                                    NW
                                                    NW       N N     NENE
                                      F FUEL                                    DEPTH
                                                                                DEPTHTHH
                                      F FUEL
                                                          Check Engine !
                                  1   50 50 50 5  % % %  F FLOAT MODE E          0 0 0  Ft F F Ft t t
                                                         O
                                                         L
                                                              O
                                                               D
                                                           AT M
                                  2                Consult YAMAHA dealer.
                                                                  °F °F
                                                                        OK
                                                            T
                                                        Water Tempp
                                                         ater
                                                        W
                                                             em
                                          TAR
                                                                               U
                                                                              HO
                                         S STARTT                             HOUSEE S
                                          1.
                                         1 11.8 8  V V                        11. 8  V V
                                                                              11.8
                                                                               h
                                                                              nc
                                                                        N
                                                                             A
                                         Bil
                                               Blower
                                          ge
                                         Bilge  Bl ower                 Navav  Anchor o r
                        1  Warning title
                        2  Message
                        Warning example
                                    Warning title                         Message
                         Check Engine                      Consult YAMAHA Dealer.
                         Low Oil Pressure                  Consult YAMAHA Dealer.
                                                           Low Voltage detected.
                         Check Battery
                                                           Consult YAMAHA Dealer.
                         GPS Communication Failure         Consult YAMAHA Dealer.
                         Transducer Communication Failure  Consult YAMAHA Dealer.
                         Joystick Communication Failure    Consult YAMAHA Dealer.
                         Stereo Remote Communication Failure  Consult YAMAHA Dealer.
                         PDM Communication Failure         Consult YAMAHA Dealer.
                         Engine Over Temperature           Consult YAMAHA Dealer.
                         Low Fuel                          Fuel level is low. Please refuel soon.
                         Low Fuel Warning                  Fuel level is less than 10%.
                         Depth Warning                     Depth alarm limit reached.
                                                                                               74]]></page><page Index="84"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 75  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                        Instrument operation

                        Check engine warning                  Check that water comes out of the outlets
                        If an engine sensor malfunction or a short cir-  while the engines are running, particularly
                        cuit is detected, a warning will appear on the  while applying throttle. If you do not see any
                        multi-function display and the buzzer will  water at the outlets, cooling water may not be
                        sound. If a fault is detected for the engines,  circulating in the engines.
                        “Check Engine” will be displayed. If this oc-
                        curs, reduce the  engine speed,  return to
                        shore, and have a Yamaha Boat Dealer check
                        the engine.

                        Low oil pressure warning
                        If the oil pressure does not rise to specifica-
                        tion, a warning will appear on the multi-func-
                        tion display and the buzzer will sound. If a                       2
                        fault is  detected for the engines, “Low Oil                    1
                        Pressure” will be displayed. At the same time,  1  Cooling water pilot outlet (starboard engine)
                        the engine speed is automatically limited to  2  Cooling water pilot outlet (port engine)
                        help prevent damage. If this occurs, reduce
                        the engine speed, return to shore or maneu-  TIP:
                        ver to a safe location, and check the engine  If the cooling water passages in the engines
                        oil level. (See page 145 for engine oil level  are dry, it will take about 20 seconds for wa-
                        checking procedures.)                 ter to reach the pilot outlets after starting.
                        If the oil level is low, add enough engine oil to
                        raise it to the proper level. If the oil level is suf-  If water is not circulating, something may be
                        ficient, have a Yamaha Boat Dealer check the  clogging the intake grates. Refer to “Jet
                        engine.                               pump clean-out procedure” on page 207.

                        Over temperature warning
                        This model is equipped with an over temper-
                        ature warning system. If the engines start to
                        overheat, a warning will appear on the multi-
                        function display and the buzzer will sound. If
                        the engine  is  over heating, “Engine Over
                        Temperature” will be displayed. At the same
                                                                        1
                        time, the engine speed is automatically limit-
                        ed to help prevent damage. If this occurs, im-
                        mediately reduce the engine speed, return to
                                                              1  Intake grate
                        shore  or maneuver to a safe location,  and
                        check for water discharge at the cooling wa-
                        ter pilot outlets. There are cooling water pilot
                        outlets on the  starboard  side of the  hull.



                        75]]></page><page Index="85"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 76  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                                                                 Instrument operation


                         NOTICE                               Low fuel level warning
                                                              If “Low Fuel” appears on the multi-function
                        If the  cause of overheating  cannot be  display, refill the fuel tank as soon as possi-
                        found and corrected, take special precau-  ble. (See page 142 for information on filling
                        tions to avoid major engine damage while  the fuel tank.)
                        you return to shore.
                        Single engine overheating — Shut off the  Depth warning
                        overheating engine and use the properly  If the boat enters an area that is shallower
                        running engine to return to shore. Operate  than the water depth set for the depth alarm,
                        at no-wake speed (8 km/h, 5 mph) to pre-  the depth warning will be activated and the
                        vent water from flooding the non-operat-  buzzer will sound.
                        ing engine through the water intake. See  If the warning is activated, move the boat to
                        page 56 for  information on the no-wake  an area that is deeper than the water depth
                        mode.                                 set for the depth alarm. (See page 71 for in-
                        Both  engines overheating  — If getting a  formation on setting the depth alarm.)
                        tow from another vessel is not possible,
                        operate both engines just slightly above
                        idle while you return to shore. If you can be
                        towed, refer to “Towing the boat” on page
                        215.

                        House/Start Battery voltage warning
                        If “Check Battery” appears on the multi-func-
                        tion display and the buzzer will sound, check
                        the battery connections. If the battery connec-
                        tions are clean and tight and the warning indi-
                        cation continues, have a Yamaha Boat Dealer
                        check the charging system.

                        Communication error warning
                        If a communication error is detected for the
                        GPS function, a sensor, or other device, a
                        warning will appear on the multi-function dis-
                        play and the buzzer will sound. If this occurs,
                        reduce the engine speed, return to shore, and
                        have a Yamaha Boat Dealer check the boat.










                                                                                               76]]></page><page Index="86"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 77  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                        Instrument operation

                                     Helm controls (except for AR250 / SX250)

                                        1              2 2      3






                                                                               252SE / 252SD
                                                               252S            / 255XE / 255XD
                                                                    4               4   5
                                                                        5                  6
                                                                           6
                                                                                            7
                                                                           7

                                                                 9               9
                                                                      8                8


                                                                 10       11
                                     252XE

                                              12



                                HORN
                                     BILGE
                           4             5

                        1  Multi-function display unit
                        2  Wireless charger
                        3  Controller
                        4  “HORN” switch
                        5  “BILGE” switch
                        6  “BLOWER” switch
                        7  “ACC”2 switch
                        8  “ACC”1 switch
                        9  “NAV LIGHT” switch
                        10 USB charger
                        11 Aux input
                        12 Steering wheel





                        77]]></page><page Index="87"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 78  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                                                                 Instrument operation

                        Switch panel                          252SE / 252SD / 255XE / 255XD
                        In addition to touching the multi-function dis-
                        play directly, you can use the switches to op-
                        erate various functions.                                    1
                        252S                                                             2
                                                                                           3

                                                1                                          4
                                                    2                            6
                                                                                     5
                                                      3
                                                      4       1  “HORN” switch
                                            6                 2  “BILGE” switch
                                                5             3  “BLOWER” switch
                                                              4  “ACC”2 switch
                                                              5  “ACC”1 switch
                        1  “HORN” switch
                                                              6  “NAV LIGHTS” switch
                        2  “BILGE” switch
                        3  “BLOWER” switch
                                                              “HORN” switch
                        4  “ACC”2 switch
                                                              Activates the horn. The horn can be used to
                        5  “ACC”1 switch
                                                              signal other boats as required by the “Rules
                        6  “NAV LIGHTS” switch
                                                              of the road”. (See page 21.)
                        252XE                                 The switch light comes on while the horn is
                                                              operating.
                                                              “BILGE” switch
                                                              Turns the bilge pump on or off. (See page
                                                              148.)
                                                              The switch light  comes on while the  bilge
                                                              pump is operating.
                                     HORN
                                            BILGE
                                                              TIP:
                                                              Even if the bilge pump is turned off, the pump
                              1                    2
                                                              will operate every 2 minutes when the house
                        1  “HORN” switch                      battery switch is in the on position.
                        2  “BILGE” switch
                                                              “BLOWER” switch
                                                              Turns the blowers on or off. (See page 159.)
                                                              The switch light comes on while the blowers
                                                              are operating.







                                                                                               78]]></page><page Index="88"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 79  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                        Instrument operation

                        “ACC”1/“ACC”2 switch                     Multi-function display unit
                        These switches can be used to operate an          operation
                        electronic device that is installed later as an
                                                              Because the multi-function display unit is
                        accessory.
                                                              equipped with a touch screen, you can touch
                        For more information,  contact a  Yamaha
                                                              the display directly to operate the display
                        Boat Dealer.
                                                              functions.
                                                              In addition to touching the display, you can
                        “NAV LIGHTS” switch                   use the joystick to operate the display func-
                        Turns the navigation lights (anchor light and
                                                              tions.
                        bow light) on or off. Each time the switch is
                        pushed, the combination of lights that are on
                                                              Touching the multi-function display
                        or off changes in the following 3 patterns.
                         Switch   Anchor   Bow   Multi-function
                         light  light   light  display
                         Off    Off     Off    -                                      RUNNING MODE
                         On     On      On                        FUEL 100 %  SE  S  SW    DEPTH .8 9  ft
                                                    Nav
                                                                    19                   19
                                                                       x1000 rpm     x1000 rpm
                         On     On      Off                         START     MPH        HOUSE
                                                  Anchor           13.0 V  9           9  13.0  V
                                                                        Bilge  Blower  Nav  Anchor



                                                              Using the joystick
                                                              This joystick has the following two operation
                                                              modes.
                                                               Volume control mode
                                                               Navigation control mode
                                                              Push the  “VOLUME–(SCROLL)” button to
                                                              switch the operation mode.

                                                                               1

                                                                              VOLUME
                                                                              (SCROLL)
                                                                           HOME   CANCEL



                                                                            CRUISE  CRUISE
                                                                            NO WAKE  NO WAKE


                                                              1  “VOLUME–(SCROLL)” button


                        79]]></page><page Index="89"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 80  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                                                                 Instrument operation

                        Volume control mode
                        Turn the joystick knob to change the audio
                        volume.
                                                                              VOLUME
                                                                              (SCROLL)
                                                                           HOME   CANCEL
                                         VOLUME
                                         (SCROLL)
                                      HOME  CANCEL
                                                                            CRUISE  CRUISE
                                                                            NO WAKE  NO WAKE
                                                 1
                                       CRUISE  CRUISE
                                       NO WAKE  NO WAKE
                                                              TIP:
                                                              Although the procedures in this manual ex-
                        1  Joystick knob                      plain how to make selections by touching the
                                                              display, you can also make selections using
                        Navigation control mode               the joystick knob.
                        (1) Turn the joystick knob to change the se-
                            lected setting or item.



                                         VOLUME
                                         (SCROLL)
                                      HOME  CANCEL
                                                 1


                                       CRUISE  CRUISE
                                       NO WAKE  NO WAKE

                        1  Joystick knob
                        (2) Push the joystick knob to select an item
                            or confirm a setting.
















                                                                                               80]]></page><page Index="90"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 81  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                        Instrument operation

                                Operation buttons             running above 3000 rpm and  below  7000
                        In addition to touching the multi-function dis-  rpm.
                        play directly, you can use the operation but-  To activate the cruise assist:
                        tons and the controller to operate  various  (1) Push the remote control levers forward
                        functions.                               to open the throttle until the desired en-
                                                                 gine speed is reached and both engines
                        Controller                               are operating at the same engine speed.
                                                              (2) Push the “CRUISE/NO WAKE” (+) button
                                      1  2 3                     or “CRUISE/NO WAKE” (–) button. When
                                                                 the cruise assist is activated, “CRUISE
                                         VOLUME
                                         (SCROLL)                ASSIST” and  the cruise assist setting
                                      HOME  CANCEL
                                                                 level will be displayed  under  the  boat
                                                                 speed.
                                                                       SE      S      SW
                                       CRUISE  CRUISE
                                       NO WAKE  NO WAKE
                                       4   5
                                Name           Function
                         1  “HOME” button  Displays the home
                                          screen. (See page 88.)              MPH
                         2  “VOLUME  –    Switches the joystick           CRUISE ASSIST:
                            (SCROLL)” but-  between the volume
                            ton           control mode and the                      1
                                          navigation control
                                          mode. When the main   1  Cruise assist setting level
                                          switches are turned to
                                          the on position, the
                                          volume control mode    Once the cruise assist is activated, the set
                                          is selected by default.  engine speed can be increased by pushing
                         3  “CANCEL” but-  Deselects the current-  the “CRUISE/NO WAKE” (+) button or de-
                            ton           ly selected item.    creased by  pushing the  “CRUISE/NO
                         4  “CRUISE/NO    Activate and set the   WAKE” (–)  button. However, the  adjust-
                            WAKE” (–) but-  cruise assist, no-wake
                            ton           mode, and reverse    ment is limited to a maximum of 8 incre-
                         5  “CRUISE/NO    RPM control. (See the   ments above or below the initial cruise
                            WAKE” (+) but-  following sections.)  assist setting. Each time a button is
                            ton                                pushed, the engine speed will increase or
                                                               decrease approximately 100–200 rpm.
                                                               While the cruise assist is activated, the en-
                        Operating the boat at a steady speed
                                                               gine speed can also be adjusted by operat-
                        (cruise assist)
                                                               ing the remote control levers.
                        The cruise assist feature is for steady engine
                        speed operation when the boat is traveling
                        above no-wake speeds. The cruise assist is
                        available for  use whenever  the engines are


                        81]]></page><page Index="91"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 82  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                                                                 Instrument operation

                        To deactivate the cruise assist:      “CRUISE/NO   WAKE”   (+)  button  or
                        Operate the remote control  levers  to de-  “CRUISE/NO WAKE” (–) button.
                        crease the engine speed to 3000 rpm or less.  To deactivate the no-wake mode:
                        When “Cruise” and the cruise assist setting  Perform one of the following operations.
                        level disappear, the cruise assist is deactivat-   Push  the “CRUISE/NO WAKE” (–) button
                        ed.                                    repeatedly until “No Wake” disappears.
                                                               Push the remote control levers forward to
                        Operating the boat with a minimal      open the throttle.
                        wake (no-wake mode)
                        The no-wake mode is useful for operating the  TIP:
                        boat at a steady speed with a minimal wake.  252SD / 255XD: If the throttle/shift paddles
                        This is especially convenient when traveling  are operated in the DRiVE X mode while the
                        in harbors, channels, or other areas posted  no-wake  mode is activated, the  no-wake
                        with low speed limits as “no wake zones”.  mode will be deactivated.
                        The no-wake mode can be  activated  only
                        when the engines are operating at idle speed.  Operating the boat in reverse with
                        To activate the no-wake mode:         more thrust (reverse RPM control)
                        (1) Put the remote control levers in the TDE  Engine speed in reverse is limited to approx-
                            position or forward position so that both  imately 4500 rpm. If more thrust is required
                            engines are operating at idle speed.  when the boat is traveling in reverse, use the
                        (2) Push the  “CRUISE/NO WAKE” (+) but-  reverse RPM control.  WARNING! Be  pre-
                            ton. When the no-wake mode is activat-  pared to  reduce throttle as  soon as the
                            ed, “No Wake” and the no-wake mode  boat moves as desired.  Otherwise, the
                            setting level will be displayed under the  boat may become unstable, which could
                            boat speed.                       result in loss of control and an accident.
                                                              To activate the reverse RPM control:
                                  SE      S      SW           (1) Move the remote control levers  back-
                                                                 ward so that the throttle is opened in re-
                                                                 verse and both engines are operating at
                                                                 the same engine speed.
                                                              (2) Increase the engine speed to 4500 rpm,
                                         MPH                     and then push the “CRUISE/NO WAKE”
                                      No Wake:                   (+) button.
                                                              Once the reverse RPM control is activated,
                                            1                 pushing the “CRUISE/NO WAKE” (+) button
                                                              will increase the  available  engine speed by
                        1  No-wake mode setting level
                                                              approximately 500 rpm in 3 stages up to a
                        The no-wake mode can be set to 3 engine  maximum of 6000 rpm, and pushing the
                        speeds. To adjust the engine speed while the  “CRUISE/NO WAKE” (–) button will decrease
                        no-wake  mode is activated, push  the  the available engine speed. However, the ad-
                                                              justment is limited to these 3 increments.


                                                                                               82]]></page><page Index="92"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 83  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                        Instrument operation

                        To deactivate the reverse RPM control:
                        Operate the remote control  levers  to de-
                        crease the engine speed to less than 4500
                        rpm.


























































                        83]]></page><page Index="93"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 84  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                                                                 Instrument operation

                                           Multi-function display elements

                              1         2          3        4                   5    6    7
                                                                                RUNNING MODE
                                                     SE     S      SW
                           FUEL                                                             DEPTH
                           100 %                                                            .8 9  ft

                               19                                                        19
                                        x1000 rpm                             x1000 rpm
                                                           MPH
                              START                                                     HOUSE
                              13.0  V  9                                           9    13.0  V
                                          Bilge  Blower               Nav  Anchor
                           16 15 14     13                 12                 11    10   9   8
                                    Name                             Function
                          1  Clock               Shows the time. Tap the clock to set the time. (See page 99.)
                          2  Port engine tachometer  Shows the engine speed.
                          3  Center display      Shows various information for each screen tab.
                          4  Screen tab bar      Shows the tabs for the various screens that can be shown on the
                                                 center display.
                          5  Starboard engine ta-  Shows the engine speed.
                             chometer
                          6  Day/Night brightness  Switches between day brightness and night brightness. (See page
                                                 100.)
                          7  Mode status         Shows the current mode. (See page 87.)
                          8  Depth level bar graph  Shows the water depth in feet or meters. Depending on the depth
                                                 alarm setting and detected water depth, the color of the bar graph
                                                 segments changes.
                          9  House battery voltage  Shows the house battery voltage in a bar graph format and numer-
                                                 ical format.
                         10  Operation mode button  Switches the operation mode. This button can be used only when
                                                 the remote control levers are in the neutral position. (See page 87.)
                         11  Starboard shift indicator  Shows the current shift position for the starboard jet thrust nozzle.
                                                 This indicator appears only when the engine is running.
                         12  Status indicator bar  Shows the operating status of various functions and displays warn-
                                                 ings.
                         13  Port shift indicator  Shows the current shift position for the port jet thrust nozzle. This
                                                 indicator appears only when the engine is running.
                         14  Warning mute button  Mutes the sound of the buzzer for a specific time depending on the
                                                 warnings present.
                         15  Start battery voltage  Shows the start battery voltage in a bar graph format and numeri-
                                                 cal format.
                         16  Fuel level bar graph  Shows the amount of fuel remaining in the fuel tank. Depending on
                                                 the amount of remaining fuel, the color of the bar graph segments
                                                 changes.
                                                                                               84]]></page><page Index="94"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 85  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                        Instrument operation

                        If the multi-function display unit is turned on while the engines are stopped, the display unit
                        will enter the float mode.
                        When the multi-function display unit is in the float mode, the following items are different than
                        they are in the running mode.
                                                  1                   2

                                                                        FLOAT MODE

                                FUEL                                                  DEPTH
                                 100 %       FM Radio                                 .8 9  ft

                                                                   Water Temp
                                      19  107.7 MHz                               19
                                                Her By                    °F



                                     START                                        HOUSE
                                    13.0  V  9                              9    13.0  V
                                                   Bilge  B       Anchor



                                    Name                             Function
                          1  Audio system function  Shows the selected function of the audio system.
                          2  Water temperature   Shows the ambient water temperature in degrees Fahrenheit or
                                                 degrees Celsius.


                        Screen tab bar
                                          1     2     3     4     5     6     7




                                    Name                             Function
                          1  Home screen tab     Displays the home screen. (See page 88.)
                          2  Map screen tab      Displays the map screen. (See page 88.)
                          3  Trip screen tab     Displays the trip screen. (See page 92.)
                          4  Drive control screen tab  Displays the drive control screen. (See page 93.)
                          5  Media screen tab    Displays the media screen. (See page 95.)
                          6  System control screen   Displays the system control screen. (See page 98.)
                             tab
                          7  Setting screen tab  Displays the setting screen. (See page 99.)




                        85]]></page><page Index="95"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 86  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                                                                 Instrument operation

                        Status indicator bar

                                        1      2            3            4      5

                                       Bilge  Blower                    Nav   Anchor

                                    Name                             Function
                          1  Bilge pump indicator  Shows the operating status of the bilge pump. When the bilge
                                                 pump is stopped, the indicator will be gray, and when the bilge
                                                 pump is operating, the indicator will be blue.
                                                 You can also tap this indicator to change the bilge pump setting.
                          2  Blower indicator    Shows the operating status of the blowers. When the house bat-
                                                 tery switch is turned to the on position, a 5-minute timer will be
                                                 shown in this indicator while the blowers operate automatically.
                                                 You can also tap this indicator to turn the blowers on or off.
                          3  Warning icon bar    Displays the warning icons.
                                                 When a warning icon is displayed, tap the icon to display the
                                                 warning message for that icon.
                          4  Navigation light indicator  Shows the operating status of the navigation light mode. (When
                                                 the navigation light mode is activated, the bow light and anchor
                                                 light are turned on.)
                                                 You can also tap this indicator to turn the navigation light mode on
                                                 or off.
                          5  Anchor light indicator  Shows the operating status of the anchor light mode. (When the
                                                 anchor light mode is activated, only the anchor light is turned on.)
                                                 You can also tap this indicator to turn the anchor light mode on or
                                                 off.






























                                                                                               86]]></page><page Index="96"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 87  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                        Instrument operation

                        Operation mode                        DRiVE X mode “  ” (252SD / 255XD)
                        When the engines are running and both re-  Both engines are operated at the same en-
                        mote control levers are in the neutral position,  gine speed and  the throttle  and shifting of
                        the operation mode can be changed by tap-  both engines are controlled using the throt-
                        ping the operation mode button.       tle/shift paddles and steering wheel switches.
                                                              “DRiVE X” is shown for the mode status.
                                         1     2
                                                              Use this mode to make small throttle adjust-
                                                              ments  when operating  the boat at  slow
                                        RUNNING MODE
                                                              speeds, such as when docking. (See page 48
                               NE
                              SW
                                                  DEPTH       for information on the throttle/shift paddles.)
                                                  .8 9  ft
                                               19
                                       x1000 rpm              TIP:
                                                               If the remote control levers are moved from
                          H
                                               HOUSE           the neutral position to the forward or re-
                                           9   13.0  V
                                 Nav  Anchor                   verse position while the DRiVE X mode is
                                                               activated, the operation mode will change
                        1  Mode status
                        2  Operation mode button               to the running mode.
                                                               When the DRiVE X mode is activated, the
                        Float mode                             engine speed will be controlled.
                        Both engines are stopped. “FLOAT-MODE”
                        is shown for the mode status.
                        The audio system function and water temper-
                        ature are shown instead of the port and star-
                        board tachometers.

                        Running mode “  ”
                        The port and starboard remote control levers
                        control the throttle and shifting for their re-
                        spective engines.  “RUNNING-MODE” is
                        shown for the mode status.

                        Single lever mode “  ”
                        Both engines are operated at the same en-
                        gine  speed and the throttle  and shifting of
                        both  engines are  controlled using only  the
                        port remote control lever. “SINGLE-LEVER”
                        is shown for the mode status.
                        The starboard remote control lever is not
                        used.






                        87]]></page><page Index="97"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 88  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                                                                 Instrument operation

                                  Home screen                            Map screen
                        This screen shows the boat speed, current  This screen displays a map.
                        heading of the boat, and other information.

                         1        NW      N       NE

                                    RUNNING MODE
                         2

                                        MPH
                                                                                 MPH
                         3
                                                                   Item            Function
                                Name           Function                      Expands the size of the
                         1  Boat speed    Shows the boat speed               map, or returns it to the
                                          in miles per hour or ki-           original size.
                                          lometers per hour.                 Shows the direction of
                         2  Heading       Shows the heading of               North at the top of the
                                          the boat.                          screen, or the current
                                                                             course being traveled at
                         3  Cruise  as-   Shows whether the
                            sist/no-wake   cruise assist or no-              the top of the screen.
                            mode status in-  wake mode is activat-
                            dicator       ed.                                Zooms out to display a
                                          When the cruise assist             more distant view of the
                                          is activated, “CRUISE              map.
                                          ASSIST” and the
                                          cruise assist setting              Zooms in to display a clos-
                                          level will be displayed.           er view of the map.
                                          When the no-wake
                                          mode is activated, “No
                                          Wake” and no-wake                  Opens the waypoint menu.
                                          mode setting level will
                                          be displayed.
                                                                             Opens the track menu.


                                                                             Displays the Map Settings.














                                                                                               88]]></page><page Index="98"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 89  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                        Instrument operation

                        Waypoint                              (3) Select  the  waypoint you want to use
                        Set a waypoint for a destination on the map.  from the list and tap “Go-To”.
                        Waypoints can be attached to any location.
                                                                          Waypoint Manager

                                      Waypoints                         AAD           EDIT
                                                                       Lat:       34.6892
                                                                       Lon:       137.5789
                                                                       Distance:    0.62 Ft.

                               Go-To        Add Waypoint          Close   Delete  View    Go-To
                                                                                           1
                                 1               2            1  “Go-To”
                        1  “Go-To”
                        2  “Add Waypoint”                     Track
                                                              Set the track and display the route on the
                        To add a Waypoint:                    map.
                        (1) Tap “   ” to open the waypoint menu.
                        (2) Tap “Add Waypoint”.
                                                                             Tracks
                        (3) Enter the name of the waypoint and tap
                            “Save”.
                                                                                           REC
                                      Add Waypoint
                                                                  Follow    Create Track  Record
                                          A   B
                                                                    1          2          3
                                     A    B   C
                                     B    C   D
                                                              1  “Follow”
                            Cancel                   Save     2  “Create Track”
                                                              3  “Record”
                                                     1
                                                              To create a track:
                        1  “Save”
                                                              (1) Tap “  ” to open the track menu.
                        TIP:                                  (2) Tap “Create Track”.
                        Check the registered waypoint information  (3) Create a route on the map and tap “Do-
                        with the waypoint manager. (See page 91)  ne”.

                        Cruising to the destination:
                        (1) Tap “   ” to open the waypoint menu.
                        (2) Tap “Go-To”.




                        89]]></page><page Index="99"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 90  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                                                                 Instrument operation

                        (4) Enter the name of the track and  tap  (4) Tap “  ” and then tap “Stop”.
                            “Save”.
                                       Add Track                             Tracks

                                                                      Stop Recording Track?
                                          A   B
                                     A    B   C
                                                                   No                    Stop
                                     B    C   D
                                                                                          1
                            Cancel                   Save
                                                     1
                                                              1  “Stop”
                        1  “Save”
                                                              (5) Tap “Save”
                        TIP:
                                                                           Track Manager
                        Check the registered track information with
                        the track manager. (See page 91)             EGG   Save Track?
                                                                     Temp
                        To follow a track:
                        (1) Tap “   ” to open the track menu.        AMA
                        (2) Tap “Follow”.
                        (3) Select the track you want to use from the
                                                                Do Not Save               Save
                            list and tap “Follow”.
                                                                                           1
                                     Track Manager
                                                              1  “Save”
                                   EAC           EDIT
                                                              (6) Enter  the name of the track and  tap
                                  Distance:    2651.68 ft
                                                                 “Save”.

                                                              Map settings screen
                                                              Perform settings for waypoints and  tracks,
                            Close   Delete   Hide    Follow
                                                              etc. on the Map Settings screen.
                                                     1
                        1  “Follow”
                        To record a track:
                        (1) Tap “   ” to open the track menu.
                        (2) Tap “Record”.
                        (3) Navigating the route registered as a truck
                            by boat.




                                                                                               90]]></page><page Index="100"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 91  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                        Instrument operation

                        Waypoints                                  Item            Function
                        Perform waypoint management. Tap “Way-              Changes the color of the
                        points” to display “Waypoint Manager”.              waypoint.

                                                              EDIT          Changes the name of the
                                     Waypoint Manager
                                                                            waypoint.
                                   AAD           EDIT         Delete        Deletes the waypoint.
                                                              Show / Hide   Shows the track on the
                                  Lat:       34.6892                        map. Hide will make that
                                                                            track invisible.
                                  Lon:       137.5789
                                  Distance:    0.62 Ft.       Follow        Display the route of the
                                                                            track on the map and start
                                                                            navigating.
                            Close   Delete   View    Go-To
                                                              Satellite status
                             Item            Function
                                                              Display detectable satellites.
                                       Changes the color of the
                                       waypoint.
                                                                     Satellite Status  N
                         EDIT          Changes the name of the    SATELLITES     3
                                       waypoint.                  9:47
                                                                  Latitude:  35.6060
                         Delete        Deletes the waypoint.      Longitude:  -84.2541
                                                                  Op Mode:  0.00  W         E
                         View          Views the waypoint on the   HDOP:  0.00
                                                                  VDOP:  0.00
                                       map.                       TDOP:  0.00
                                                                  SOG:  0.0
                         Go-To         Displays the route to the   COG:  0
                                       waypoint on the map.                          S
                                                                 Close
                        Tracks
                        Perform track management. Tap “Tracks” to
                                                              Depth / Position
                        display “Track Manager”.
                                                              Perform settings  for contour lines and  safe
                                                              depths.
                                     Track Manager
                                   EAC           EDIT                      Depth / Position

                                  Distance:    2651.68 ft         DEPTH CONTOUR
                                                                    All  66ft  33ft  16ft  6ft  0ft
                                                                  SAFETY CONTOUR
                                                                    66ft  33ft  16ft  6ft  0ft
                            Close   Delete   Hide    Follow
                                                                 Close






                        91]]></page><page Index="101"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 92  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                                                                 Instrument operation

                        To perform settings, select the desired depth.   Trip screen
                        Set depths are reflected on the map.  This screen displays the hours of engine op-
                                                              eration, fuel consumption, and other informa-
                        Chart Setup                           tion.
                        Perform settings for functions displayed on
                        the map.                                              1            2 3
                                                                      NW       N        NE
                                                                     Economy :
                                       Chart Setup                                0.0 MPG
                                                                    Trip Distance:  0.0 Mi
                               SHOW GRIDS     SHOW  TRACKS
                                                                     Fuel Used :  0.0 Gal
                               SHOW TEXT      SHOW NAV AIDS
                                                                     Fuel Flow :  0.0 GPH
                               SHOW WAYPOINTS  SHOW WAYPOINT NAMES
                                                                                          Reset All
                            Close
                                                              1  Menu
                                                              2  Scrollbar
                                                              3  “Reset All” button
                        To perform settings, select the item you want
                        to display.                           The menu displays the following items. Scroll
                                                              through the menu items using the scrollbar.
                                                                  Name             Function
                                                              Economy       Shows the average dis-
                                                                            tance that can be traveled
                                                                            on 1.0 gallon or 1.0 liter of
                                                                            fuel. When gallons are se-
                                                                            lected for the display units,
                                                                            the value is shown in miles
                                                                            and when liters are selected
                                                                            for the display units, the
                                                                            value is shown in kilome-
                                                                            ters.
                                                              Trip Distance  Shows the distance trav-
                                                                            eled by the boat in miles or
                                                                            kilometers since the item
                                                                            was last reset.
                                                              Fuel Used     Shows the total fuel that
                                                                            has been consumed by the
                                                                            port and starboard engines
                                                                            in gallons or liters.
                                                              Fuel Flow*    Shows the total fuel con-
                                                                            sumption of the port and
                                                                            starboard engines in gal-
                                                                            lons per hour or liters per
                                                                            hour.





                                                                                               92]]></page><page Index="102"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 93  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                        Instrument operation


                             Name            Function               Drive control screen
                         Water         Shows the ambient water   This screen can be used to set a target speed
                         Temperature*  temperature in degrees   for the boat, increase the set speed.
                                       Fahrenheit or degrees Cel-
                                       sius.
                         Average Speed  Shows the average boat     WKS  WKB
                                       speed in miles per hour or   Target Speed  21.0
                                       kilometers per hour.
                         Highest Speed  Shows the highest speed of   Acceleration  Fast
                                       the boat in miles per hour or
                                       kilometers per hour.
                         Port Engine   Shows the total number of
                         Hours*        hours that the port engine
                                       has been running since the
                                       boat was new.              Set                      Save
                         Starboard     Shows the total number of
                         Engine Hours*  hours that the starboard en-
                                       gine has been running since
                                       the boat was new.      To activate the drive control:
                                                              (1) Tap the tab you want to set.
                        * This item cannot be reset.
                                                              (2) Tap the target speed.
                                                              (3) To set  the speed,  tap each digit and
                        To reset an item on the trip screen:
                                                                 scroll  up or down, and  then tap  the
                        Touch and hold the “  ” of the item that
                                                                 “Back” button.
                        you want to reset for several seconds.
                        To reset all of the display items:
                        Touch the “Reset All” button to reset all of the
                        items.
                                                                          8         0

                                                                          9         1




                                                              (4) Tap the desired acceleration profile.
                                                              TIP:
                                                              You can select from “Manual”, “Slow”, and
                                                              “Medium”.












                        93]]></page><page Index="103"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 94  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                                                                 Instrument operation

                        (5) 252XE / 255XE / 255XD: Tap the desired  (11) After setting the preceding items, tap the
                            ballast level.                       “Set” button.
                        (6) 252XE / 255XE / 255XD: Tap “  ”  or  (12) Move the remote control levers to the ful-
                            “  ”  to set the  weight of each  ballast  ly open position.
                            tank.                             TIP:
                                                               If the remote control levers are  moved
                                                               slowly to the fully open position, the boat
                                                               may not accelerate according to the select-
                                                               ed acceleration profile or reach the set tar-
                             Fill All              Drain All   get speed.
                                    35   45   35
                                                               If the single lever mode is activated, move
                                                               only the remote control lever for the port
                                                               engine to the fully open position. (See page
                                                               87 for information on the single lever mode
                            Back        Activate
                                                               button.)
                                                               255XE / 255XD: Boat speed is limited to 15
                        TIP:
                                                               mph (24  km/h) when deploying  Wake-
                         Tap “Fill All” to make all of the tanks 100%,
                                                               Booster.
                          and tap “Drain All” to make all of the tanks
                                                               255XE / 255XD: A warning message is dis-
                          0%.
                                                               played on the multi-function display when
                         Tap “Activate” to activate the ballast.
                                                               overcurrent  occurs. The button name on
                                                               the side where overcurrent has occurred
                        (7) 255XE / 255XD: Tap the “Port” button or
                                                               turns red.
                            “Stbd” button of “SURFPOINTE”.
                                                               252SD / 255XD: While the DRiVE X mode is
                        (8) 255XE / 255XD: Tap “  ” to deploy, tap
                                                               activated, the drive control mode cannot
                            “  ”  to  stow.
                                                               be used.
                                                              To deactivate the drive control:
                                                              (1) Return the remote control levers to the
                                                                 neutral position.
                                   Deploy     Stow
                                                              (2) Tap the “CANCEL” button.


                            Back
                        TIP:
                        Only one flap can be opened.

                        (9) Tap the “Save” button.
                        (10) Select the characters  you want to  set,
                            tap the “Save” button.


                                                                                               94]]></page><page Index="104"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 95  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                        Instrument operation

                                  Media screen                currently connected device, and  then  con-
                        This screen can be used to receive a radio  nect the other device.
                        broadcast, connect to an external device us-
                        ing Bluetooth wireless technology, and per-  To change the volume:
                        form other functions.                 The following slider is displayed in each
                                                              screen.
                                                              Use the slider control to change the volume.
                                        Source
                                                                               1
                                  AM Radio    FM Radio
                                  Weather     Bluetooth
                                        Auxiliary             1  Slider control

                                                              TIP:
                           Turn Off   Select a Source  Zone Control
                                                              The volume can also be adjusted by tapping
                                                              the  “   ”  or  “  ”  button.
                              Item            Function
                         AM Radio      Switches the source to the
                                       AM radio tuner and dis-  Radio screen (AM/FM)
                                       plays the AM radio screen.  You can receive a radio broadcast.
                         FM Radio      Switches the source to the
                                       FM radio tuner and dis-
                                       plays the FM radio screen.      AM Radio       AM-1
                         Weather       Switches the source to the   1  1710  2  3  4    5
                                       weather radio tuner and
                                       displays the weather radio              P1
                                       screen.
                                                                            1710 kHz
                         Bluetooth     Switches the source to an
                                       external device connected
                                       using Bluetooth wireless
                                       technology, and displays
                                       the Bluetooth screen.     Source           MPH    Zone Control
                         Auxiliary     Switches the source to the
                                       auxiliary device and dis-   Item            Function
                                       plays the auxiliary screen.
                                                                             Decreases the radio sta-
                         Turn Off      Turns the audio system on             tion frequency. Touch and
                                       or off.                               hold this button to auto-
                         Zone Control  Displays the volume ad-               matically seek the next
                                       justment screen for each              available radio station.
                                       zone.                                 Decreases the radio sta-
                                                                             tion frequency.
                        TIP:
                        If multiple external devices are connected at        Increases the radio station
                        the same time, the audio system may not op-          frequency.
                        erate properly. When switching from one ex-
                        ternal device to another one, disconnect the


                        95]]></page><page Index="105"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 96  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                                                                 Instrument operation


                              Item            Function        Weather screen
                                       Increases the radio station   You can receive a weather broadcast.
                                       frequency. Touch and hold
                                       this button to automatically
                                       seek the next available ra-      NOAA National Weather
                                       dio station.
                         Source        Displays the media screen.
                                                                        CH 1 -0.000 kHz
                        To change the radio station frequency:     1   2   3   4   5   6   7
                        Tap “   ” or “  ” to tune to a receivable
                        frequency.
                                                                 Source           MPH    Zone Control
                        To save a radio station frequency to a preset
                        button:
                        Tune the radio to the desired radio station,  To change the radio station, tap a preset but-
                        and then touch and hold the desired preset  ton.
                        button for several seconds.
                                                              Bluetooth screen
                                         1
                                                              Smartphones and other external devices that
                                  AM Radio      AM-1          are compatible with Bluetooth can be con-
                              1    2    3    4    5
                               1710                           nected wirelessly to the audio system to lis-
                                                              ten to the audio tracks stored on the devices
                                          P1
                                                              through the audio system’s speakers.
                                      1710 kHz
                                                                       Bluetooth
                           Source            MPH   Zone Control            Best Of You
                                                                           Foo Fighters
                                                                           In Your Honor
                        1  Preset button



                                                                 Source           MPH    Zone Control


                                                                   Item            Function
                                                                             Displays the external de-
                                                                             vice management screen.
                                                                             Displays information about
                                                                             the current audio track.






                                                                                               96]]></page><page Index="106"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 97  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                        Instrument operation

                        To connect an external device:
                        (1) Tap the “  ” button, and then select
                            “+Add Device”.
                        (2) Turn on the Bluetooth function of the ex-
                            ternal device, and  then search for  the
                            multi-function display unit of the boat.
                                                                                             1
                        TIP:
                        Make sure that other external devices have
                        their Bluetooth function disabled before be-
                        ginning the pairing  process to reduce  con-
                        nection issues.                       1  Auxiliary input jack


                        (3) Tap the “Connect” button, and the “Con-  TIP:
                            firm Pairing on  Device”  screen is dis-   You can adjust the volume level of  the
                            played.                            speakers using the multi-function display
                        (4) Select “OK” for both the multi-function  unit or the volume control of the external
                            display unit and the external device.  device.
                                                               To select the audio tracks, use the external
                        To disconnect an external device, turn off the  device.
                        Bluetooth function of the external device.
                                                              Zone control screen
                        Auxiliary screen                      Perform volume adjustment for each zone.
                        Portable media players  and other external
                        devices can be connected to the audio sys-
                                                                            Zone Control
                        tem to listen to the audio tracks stored on the
                        devices through the audio system’s speak-          100
                        ers.                                         100      100   100


                                       Auxiliary

                                                                 Back     Selected Zone: Interior



                                                              To adjust the volume:
                                                              (1) Tap the highlighted part.
                           Source           MPH    Zone Control  (2) Adjust by moving the slider control to the
                                                                 left or right.
                                                              (3) Tap “Back”.
                                                              TIP:
                                                              Zones that can be set differ depending on the
                                                              specifications.


                        97]]></page><page Index="107"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 98  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                                                                 Instrument operation

                             System control screen
                        The system control screen can be used to               1
                        turn the boat lights on and off.
                        When a light is turned on, it will be indicated
                        on the illustration of the boat shown on the  1  Slider control
                        screen.
                                                              TIP:
                                                              The brightness can also be adjusted by tap-
                                                              ping the “   ” or “    ” button.







                            Courtesy

                              Item            Function
                         Courtesy      Turns the courtesy lights
                                       on or off. (See page 31 for
                                       information on the location
                                       of the courtesy lights.)
                         Docking       Turns the docking lights on
                                       or off.
                         Tower         Turns the tower lights on or
                                       off.
                         Helm          Turns the illumination on or
                         (252SE / 252SD /  off for the panels on the
                         255XE / 255XD)  port and starboard sides of
                                       the steering wheel.
                         Shower (252S /   Turns the shower pump on
                         252SE / 252SD)  or off. (See page 126 for in-
                                       formation on the shower.)
                         Underwater    Turns the underwater lights
                                       on or off.


                        To adjust the brightness of the lights:
                        Tap the item you want to adjust the bright-
                        ness for, and move the slider control left or
                        right to adjust.








                                                                                               98]]></page><page Index="108"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 99  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                        Instrument operation

                                  Setting screen              Time setting screen
                        The setting screen can be used to change the  Perform settings related to the time.
                        settings of the multi-function display unit.
                                                                              Time

                                        Menu                         12-Hour:    24-Hour:
                                  Time         Depth
                                                                     GMT Offset:    -4
                                  Unit       Brightness
                                                                   Daylight Saving Time:  Disabled
                                 Wellness     Language
                               Tuner Region  Auto Volume
                                                                 Back
                                                     Reset
                                                              To set the time:
                              Item            Function
                                                              (1) Select a 12 hour display or 24 hour dis-
                         Time          Displays the time setting
                                       screen.                   play.
                         Depth         Displays the depth alarm   (2) Tap “  ” or “  ” to adjust GMT off-
                                       setting screen.           set.
                         Unit          Displays the unit setting   (3) Select to enable or disable daylight sav-
                                       screen.
                                                                 ing time.
                         Brightness    Displays the brightness
                                       setting screen.
                                                              Depth alarm setting screen
                         Wellness      Displays the maintenance
                                       setting screen.        The water depth for the depth alarm can be
                         Language      Displays the language set-  set.
                                       ting screen.
                         Tuner Region  Displays the tuner region           Set Depth Alarm
                                       setting screen.
                         Auto Volume   Displays the auto volume
                                       setting screen.
                                                                              5.0 Ft
                         DRiVE X (252SD /  Displays the DRiVE X set-
                         255XD)        ting screen.
                         Reset         Displays the factory reset
                                       screen.
                                                                 Back
                                                                               1

                                                              1  Slider control
                                                              To adjust the water depth setting:
                                                              (1) Move the slider control left or right.
                                                              TIP:
                                                               The water depth can also be adjusted by
                                                               tapping the “  ” or “  ” button.


                        99]]></page><page Index="109"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 100  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                                                                 Instrument operation

                         If the water depth is set to 0.0 m (0.0 ft), the
                          depth alarm will not operate.                        1

                        (2) Tap “Back” to complete the setting.
                                                              1  Slider control
                        Unit setting screen
                        The display units for the multi-function dis-  TIP:
                        play unit can be changed.             The brightness can also be adjusted by tap-
                                                              ping the “   ” or “    ” button.
                                        Set Unit
                                                              (3) Tap “Back”.
                                       U.S. Std
                                                              Maintenance setting screen
                                U.S. Std        Metric
                                                              This screen displays the number of hours that
                                                              the engines have been running since the last
                                                              maintenance.
                            Back
                                                                       Time Since Last Maintenance
                        Select “U.S. Std” or “Metric”.             Port Engine          0  Hrs

                        Brightness setting screen                  Starboard Engine     0  Hrs
                        The multi-function  display has a day mode
                        and a night mode.
                        The brightness can be set separately for the  Back                Reset
                        day mode and for the night mode.


                                      Set Brightness          After maintenance  is performed, reset  the
                                                              number of hours of operation as follows.
                                  Night:    30  Day:    90
                                                              To reset the number of hours of operation:
                                                              (1) Tap the “Reset” button.
                                                              (2) When the confirmation message ap-
                                                                 pears, tap the “YES” button to reset the
                            Back                                 number of hours of operation.
                                                              TIP:
                                                              To return to the maintenance setting screen
                        To set the brightness:                without  resetting the number of hours, tap
                        (1) Set either “Night” or “Day”.      the “NO” button.
                        (2) Move the slider control left or right to ad-
                            just.


                                                                                             100]]></page><page Index="110"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 101  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                        Instrument operation

                        Language setting screen
                        The language for the  multi-function  display    Auto Volume Settings
                        unit can be changed.
                                                                   Auto Volume Status:  Off
                                      Set Language
                                                                      Intensity:    1
                                  English     Espanol

                                                                 Back
                                        Francais
                                                              To turn on or off the auto volume, tap “Off”.
                            Back                              To control the intensity of auto volume, tap
                                                              the up and down arrows.
                                                              To return to the menu screen, tap “Back”.
                        To change the language, tap the desired lan-
                        guage.                                DRiVE X setting screen (252SD /
                                                              255XD)
                        Tuner Region setting screen           Settings related to DRiVE X can be changed
                        Set the region in which the multi-function dis-  on this screen.
                        play unit will be used.

                                                                          DRiVE X Settings
                                      Tuner Region
                                                                     Display Tips
                                                                     Default RPM     STD
                                North America  South America
                                                                     Neutral Steering Assist
                                  Japan       Taiwan
                                                                  Back
                            Back
                                                              To switch between displaying  and hiding
                                                              pop-ups when using the DRiVE X function,
                        To change the tuner region, tap the desired  select Display Tips.
                        region.                               To switch between normal and high engine
                                                              speeds when operating in DRiVE X mode, se-
                        Auto Volume setting screen            lect either “STD” or “HIGH” for Default RPM.
                        Auto Volume  will automatically  control the  Even if the remote control lever is in the neu-
                        level of volume when overcoming wind or en-  tral position,  if the boat speed is about
                        gine noise.                           10 km/h or more, select Neutral Steering As-
                                                              sist (function that assists turning) to turn neu-
                                                              tral steering assist on or off.



                        101]]></page><page Index="111"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 102  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                                                                 Instrument operation

                        Factory reset screen
                        This screen can be set to the factory settings.
                                                                      Ballast Overdrain Initiated

                               Are you sure you would like to reset to  Port  Center    Stbd
                                     factory settings?
                                                                    30        30        30
                                  You cannot undo this action!
                                                                    OFF       ON        OFF



                           Cancel                    Conﬁrm
                                                              TIP:
                        To reset to the factory setting:       The flush-out time cannot be adjusted. The
                        (1) Tap “Confirm”.                     default setting is 30 seconds to avoid dam-
                        (2) When the confirmation message ap-  aging a ballast pump when there is no wa-
                            pears, tap the “YES” button.       ter remaining in a tank and/or to prevent
                                                               excessive battery drain.
                        Flush-out ballasts (252XE / 255XE /    If the flush-out time is not sufficient to re-
                        255XD)                                 move all the water from a tank, continue
                        The flush-out ballasts can be used to drain  the draining process until it is empty. Stop
                        the water in the ballast tanks with the multi-  the process immediately once all the water
                        function display unit.                 has been removed from each tank.
                                                               If you have any questions, consult a
                        To drain the water in a ballast tank:  Yamaha Boat Dealer.
                        (1) Tap the Drive Control Screen Tab.
                        (2) Tap Ballast Level.                (5) When finished, tap “ON” to return to the
                        (3) Set the value of  the tank you  want  to  previous screen.
                            drain to 0.






                             Fill All              Drain All
                                    0     0    0



                            Back        Activate



                        (4) Tap “  ”. “Ballast Overdrain Initiated” is
                            displayed, and draining starts.


                                                                                             102]]></page><page Index="112"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 103  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                        Instrument operation

                                                       Warnings
                        If a malfunction or fault occurs, a warning buzzer will sound and a warning icon and warning
                        message will be displayed on the display.
                        If the displayed warning message includes instructions, follow those instructions. If you have
                        any questions, consult a Yamaha Boat Dealer.
                                                               1
                                                                                RUNNING MODE
                                   0
                                  1 10:27 am                                    R RUNNING MODE
                                    27
                                    :
                                      am
                                                     N
                                                     NEE    N N    N NWW
                           FUELEL                                                           D D DEPTH
                                                                                            DEPTH
                           FU
                           100
                           100 %                          Check Engine !                    .8 9.8 ftt ft 8 9 9 9
                           100
                              %
                              %
                           100%
                                                          S
                                                          SPEEDPEED
                                                   Consult YAMAHA dealer.
                               19 19                                                     19 19
                                                                             x1000 rp
                                                                                 m
                                       x1000 rpmm                            x1000 rpm
                                       x1000 rp
                                                                    mp
                                                                    mphh  OK
                                                                                         OUSE
                                                                                        H
                              STAR
                              STARTT                                                    HOUSE
                              13.0 0  V V  9 9                                     9 9  13.0  V V
                                                                                        13.0
                              13.
                                                                             h
                                                                              o
                                                                             c
                                                                      Na
                                                                            n
                                               Blower
                                          Bilgee
                                          Bil g  Bl o w e r           Navv  A Anchorr
                                                               2
                        1  Warning title
                        2  Message
                        Warning example
                                    Warning title                         Message
                         Check Engine                      Consult YAMAHA Dealer.
                         Low Oil Pressure                  Consult YAMAHA Dealer.
                                                           Low Voltage detected.
                         Check Battery
                                                           Consult YAMAHA Dealer.
                         GPS Communication Failure         Consult YAMAHA Dealer.
                         Transducer Communication Failure  Consult YAMAHA Dealer.
                         Joystick Communication Failure    Consult YAMAHA Dealer.
                         Stereo Remote Communication Failure  Consult YAMAHA Dealer.
                                                           Surfpointe is in deploy state. Reduce Speed.
                         Surfpointe Communication Failure
                                                           Consult YAMAHA Dealer.
                         PDM Communication Failure         Consult YAMAHA Dealer.
                         Engine Over Temperature           Consult YAMAHA Dealer.
                         Low Fuel                          Fuel level is low. Please refuel soon.
                         Low Fuel Warning                  Fuel level is less than 10%.
                         Depth Warning                     Depth alarm limit reached.
                        103]]></page><page Index="113"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 104  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                                                                 Instrument operation

                        Check engine warning                  Check that water comes out of the outlets
                        If an engine sensor malfunction or a short cir-  while the engines are running, particularly
                        cuit is detected, a warning will appear on the  while applying throttle. If you do not see any
                        multi-function display and the buzzer will  water at the outlets, cooling water may not be
                        sound. If a fault is detected for the engines,  circulating in the engines.
                        “Check Engine” will be displayed. If this oc-  252S / 252SE / 252SD / 252XE
                        curs, reduce the  engine speed,  return to
                        shore, and have a Yamaha Boat Dealer check
                        the engine.

                        Low oil pressure warning
                        If the oil pressure does not rise to specifica-
                        tion, a warning will appear on the multi-func-
                        tion display and the buzzer will sound. If a
                        fault is  detected for the engines, “Low Oil                    1  2
                        Pressure” will be displayed. At the same time,
                        the engine speed is automatically limited to  1  Cooling water pilot outlet (starboard engine)
                        help prevent damage. If this occurs, reduce  2  Cooling water pilot outlet (port engine)
                        the engine speed, return to shore or maneu-
                                                              255XE / 255XD
                        ver to a safe location, and check the engine
                        oil level. (See page 145 for engine oil level
                        checking procedures.)
                        If the oil level is low, add enough engine oil to
                        raise it to the proper level. If the oil level is suf-
                        ficient, have a Yamaha Boat Dealer check the
                        engine.

                        Over temperature warning
                        This model is equipped with an over temper-                           1
                        ature warning system. If the engines start to
                                                              1  Cooling water pilot outlet (starboard engine)
                        overheat, a warning will appear on the multi-
                        function display and the buzzer will sound. If
                        the engine  is  over heating, “Engine Over
                        Temperature” will be displayed. At the same
                        time, the engine speed is automatically limit-
                        ed to help prevent damage. If this occurs, im-
                        mediately reduce the engine speed, return to
                        shore  or maneuver to a safe location,  and
                        check for water discharge at the cooling wa-
                        ter pilot outlets. There are cooling water pilot  1
                        outlets on the  starboard  side of the  hull.
                                                              1  Cooling water pilot outlet (port engine)

                                                                                             104]]></page><page Index="114"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 105  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                        Instrument operation


                        TIP:                                  Low/High voltage warning
                        If the cooling water passages in the engines  If “Check Battery” appears on the multi-func-
                        are dry, it will take about 20 seconds for wa-  tion display and the buzzer will sound, check
                        ter to reach the pilot outlets after starting.  the battery connections. If the battery connec-
                                                              tions are clean and tight and the warning indi-
                        If water is not circulating, something may be  cation continues, have a Yamaha Boat Dealer
                        clogging the intake  grates. Refer to “Jet  check the charging system.
                        pump clean-out procedure” on page 207.
                                                              Communication error warning
                                                              If a communication error is detected for the
                                                              GPS function, a sensor, or other device, a
                                                              warning will appear on the multi-function dis-
                                                              play and the buzzer will sound. If this occurs,
                                                              reduce the engine speed, return to shore, and
                                                              have a Yamaha Boat Dealer check the boat.
                                   1
                                                              Low fuel level warning
                                                              If “Low Fuel” appears on the multi-function
                                                              display, refill the fuel tank as soon as possi-
                        1  Intake grate
                                                              ble. (See page 142 for information on filling
                                                              the fuel tank.)
                         NOTICE
                        If the  cause of overheating  cannot be  Depth warning
                        found and corrected, take special precau-  If the boat enters an area that is shallower
                        tions to avoid major engine damage while  than the water depth set for the depth alarm,
                        you return to shore.                  the depth warning will be activated and the
                        Single engine overheating — Shut off the  buzzer will sound.
                        overheating engine and use the properly  If the warning is activated, move the boat to
                        running engine to return to shore. Operate  an area that is deeper than the water depth
                        at no-wake speed (8 km/h, 5 mph) to pre-  set for the depth alarm. (See page 99 for in-
                        vent water from flooding the non-operat-  formation on setting the depth alarm.)
                        ing engine through the water intake. See
                        page 82 for  information on the no-wake
                        mode.
                        Both  engines overheating  — If getting a
                        tow from another vessel is not possible,
                        operate both engines just slightly above
                        idle while you return to shore. If you can be
                        towed, refer to “Towing the boat” on page
                        215.



                        105]]></page><page Index="115"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 106  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                                                                 Equipment operation

                                       Seats                   ator or striking a passenger,  which
                                                               could result in an accident.
                             WARNING
                        Passengers must always sit in a designat-                           1
                        ed  seating area, place feet on  the  deck,
                        and hold on to the handgrips, handrails, or
                        straps when the boat is in motion.

                        This  boat  is equipped with the following
                        seats.
                         1 2 3                     4  5  1



                                                              1  Bow filler cushion
                                                              These cushions can also be used to create a
                                                              temporary center seat.




                        1  Handrail
                        2  Front port seat (rear)
                        3  Front port seat (front)
                        4  Front starboard seat (front)                                     1
                        5  Front starboard seat (rear)
                        Two bow filler cushions are provided for use
                        while the boat is not being operated.
                                                              1  Bow filler cushion
                        These cushions can be used to make a large
                        flat area in the bow for use as a sundeck.
                        To remove or install the bow filler cushions,
                        lift up the front seats (rear).
                             WARNING
                         Do not use the bow filler cushions while
                          the boat is underway.  A passenger
                          could lose balance and fall on the deck
                          or overboard, causing injury or death.
                         Stow the cushions securely before oper-
                          ating the boat. A loose cushion could be
                          blown by the wind, distracting the oper-




                                                                                             106]]></page><page Index="116"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 107  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                        Equipment operation

                                                              (2) Rotate the lever to port (left).







                                                      5
                                      2    3
                                              4
                                     1
                        1  Rear starboard seat
                        2  Starboard engine hood seat         (3) Move  the seat to  the desired  position,
                        3  Port engine hood seat                 and then release the lever.
                        4  Rear port seat
                                                              (4) Push the lever to its original position.
                        5  Handgrip
                                                              To swivel the seat:
                                                              (1) Extend the slide/swivel lock lever.
                        Driver’s seat
                                                              (2) Rotate the lever to starboard (right).
                        The driver’s seat can slide forward and rear-
                        ward, and the seat can swivel, and the back-
                        rest angle can be adjusted. In addition, the
                        seat bolster at the front of the seat can be
                        flipped up to change the seat style for a
                        raised seating position.
                        Make sure that the seat is securely locked in
                        place before getting underway.
                        To slide the seat:
                        (1) Extend the slide/swivel lock lever.













                                1
                        1  Slide/swivel lock lever







                        107]]></page><page Index="117"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 108  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                                                                 Equipment operation

                        (3) Swivel the seat to the desired position. If  To use the armrests:
                            it is too easy or too difficult to rotate the  Lower the armrests until they stop.
                            seat, adjust the swivel friction by turning
                            the swivel friction knob in or out.







                                                                                          1



                                                1             1  Armrest

                        1  Swivel friction knob               To adjust the backrest angle:
                                                              While lifting the adjusting lever on the star-
                        (4) Push the lever to its original position.  board side of the seat, move the backrest to
                        To flip up the seat bolster:          the desired position.
                        Lift up the seat bolster at the front of the seat
                        so that it is resting against the backrest.










                                                                                              1
                             1                                1  Adjusting lever

                        1  Seat bolster                       TIP:
                                                              Depending on the direction and position of
                                                              the seat, it may not be possible to adjust the
                                                              backrest angle.













                                                                                             108]]></page><page Index="118"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 109  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                        Equipment operation

                        Passenger’s seat
                                                                  WARNING
                        The passenger’s seat can be adjusted in the
                        same ways as the driver’s seat.       Do  not sit on the swim  platform seats
                        See “Driver’s seat” for instructions on adjust-  while the  engines are  running. Exhaust
                        ing the seat. However, the seat bolster of the  gases coming from underneath the swim
                        passenger’s seat cannot be adjusted.  platform contain carbon monoxide, a col-
                                                              orless, odorless gas which may cause
                                                              brain damage or death when inhaled.
                                              1
                                                              When the backrests are toward the stern, the
                                                              center seat and the removable backrest can
                                                              be installed.



                                                                                    1


                        1  Passenger’s seat                                          2
                        Engine hood seat
                        The position of the backrest for the engine
                        hood seats  can  be changed by pulling the
                        lock lever  toward the bow or toward the
                                                              1  Backrest
                        stern.
                                                              2  Center seat
                                           1
                                                              The center seat can also be installed upside
                                                              down to use as a beverage holder.
                                                              Swim platform seat
                                                              (252S / 252SE / 252SD / 255XE /
                                        2                     255XD)
                                                              The swim platform seats are provided on the
                                                              swim platform. WARNING! Do not sit on the
                                                              swim platform seats while the engines are
                        1  Backrest                           running. Exhaust gases coming from un-
                        2  Lock lever                         derneath the swim platform contain car-
                                                              bon monoxide, a colorless, odorless gas
                        By moving the backrest toward the bow, the  which may cause brain damage or death
                        seating area of the swim platform seats can  when inhaled.
                        be increased, and by moving the backrest to
                        the stern, a seating space for the cabin area
                        can be created.


                        109]]></page><page Index="119"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 110  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                                                                 Equipment operation

                                                              To install an underwater seat, fit the seat pole
                                        1                     into the  seat  bracket,  and then secure the
                                                              pole by inserting the lock pin.








                                                                                          2

                        1  Swim platform seat
                                                                    1       3
                        Underwater seats (252S / 252SE /
                        252SD)                                1  Seat bracket
                        The underwater seats can be used to sit in  2  Seat pole
                        the water  while  the boat is  moored or an-  3  Lock pin
                        chored.
                        Remove the seats  before starting the en-  TIP:
                        gines,  and install  the seats only  when the   The underwater seats can also be installed
                        boat is stopped and the engines are not run-  upside down to use as beverage holders.
                        ning.                                  The underwater seats will float if acciden-
                                                               tally dropped into the water.
                             WARNING
                        Do not sit on the underwater seats while
                        the engines  are running.  Exhaust gases
                        coming from underneath the swim plat-
                        form contain carbon monoxide, a color-
                        less, odorless gas which may cause brain
                        damage or death when inhaled.












                                              1


                        1  Underwater seat



                                                                                             110]]></page><page Index="120"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 111  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                        Equipment operation

                                   Engine hood                    Storage compartments
                         NOTICE                               This boat is equipped with the following con-
                                                              venient on-board storage compartments.
                        When opening the engine hood, keep the  Make sure  that the storage  compartments
                        backrest in the rear position. If the back-  are securely closed before getting underway.
                        rest is in the forward position, the engine
                        hood may fall, resulting in injury.   Anchor storage compartment
                                                              The anchor storage compartment is located
                        The engine hood can be opened to access
                                                              at the bow.
                        the engines.
                                                              To open the anchor storage compartment:
                        The engine hood latch is located under the
                                                              Pull the anchor storage compartment lid latch
                        front of each engine hood seat.
                                                              to open the lid.
                        To prevent excess water from spilling onto
                        the engines after a rainfall or washing down
                        the boat, wipe off the seat cushions before                          1
                        opening the engine hood.
                        To open the engine hood, pull the engine
                        hood latch up and lift the engine hood.
                                                                  2






                                                              1  Anchor storage compartment lid
                           1                                  2  Anchor storage compartment lid latch


                                                     2
                        1  Engine hood
                        2  Engine hood latch
                        To close the engine hood, push the front of                       1
                        each engine hood seat down to securely lock
                        it in place.

                                                              1  Anchor storage compartment

                                                              When storing the anchor, place some cush-
                                                              ioning material or the anchor line under the
                                                              anchor.





                        111]]></page><page Index="121"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 112  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                                                                 Equipment operation

                        To close the anchor storage compartment:  Ski locker
                        Close the  anchor  storage compartment lid,  NOTICE
                        and then push it to securely lock it in place.
                                                              252XE / 255XE / 255XD: This storage com-
                        Front underseat storage               partment contains a ballast bag. Do not
                        compartments                          store sharp items in this storage compart-
                        The front underseat storage compartment  ment to prevent the ballast bag from being
                        (starboard) and front underseat storage com-  punctured.
                        partment (port) are located  under  the front
                                                              The ski locker is located under the floor.
                        starboard seat and front port seat respective-
                                                              To open the ski locker:
                        ly.
                                                              (1) Pull the lock handle up.
                        To open a front underseat storage compart-
                                                              (2) Turn the lock handle clockwise, and then
                        ment, lift the front seat (rear) up.
                                                                 open the ski locker lid.
                                                                1







                                                 1                                             2

                        1  Front starboard seat (rear)
                                                              1  Lock handle
                                                              2  Ski locker lid










                                                                                         1
                             1


                        1  Front underseat storage compartment
                                                              1  Ski locker
                        To close a front underseat storage compart-
                        ment, lower the front seat (rear).    To close the ski locker:
                                                              (1) Close the ski locker lid.



                                                                                             112]]></page><page Index="122"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 113  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                        Equipment operation

                        (2) Turn the lock  handle counterclockwise  Rear underseat storage compartment
                            and make  sure that  the lid is  securely  (starboard)
                            closed.                           NOTICE
                        (3) Push the lock handle down.
                        To drain water from the ski locker:   252XE / 255XE / 255XD: This storage com-
                        (1) Remove the drain plug on the bottom of  partment contains a ballast tank. Be care-
                            the ski locker to drain the water.  ful not to store items in this area that could
                                                              be crushed or  might damage the ballast
                                                              tank.
                                                              The rear underseat  storage compartment
                                                              (starboard) is located  under  the rear star-
                                                              board seat.
                                                              To open the rear underseat storage compart-
                                                              ment (starboard), lift the rear starboard seat
                                             1
                                                              up.


                        1  Drain plug
                                                                                            1
                        (2) Securely install the drain plug in its origi-
                            nal position.






                                                              1  Rear starboard seat




                                                                                1










                                                              1  Rear underseat storage compartment (star-
                                                                board)





                        113]]></page><page Index="123"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 114  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                                                                 Equipment operation

                        To close the rear underseat storage compart-  To close the rear underseat storage compart-
                        ment (starboard), lower the rear starboard  ment (port), lower the rear starboard seat.
                        seat.
                                                              Enclosed head compartment
                        Rear underseat storage compartment    The port console has a large compartment
                        (port)                                suitable for use  as an  on-board  changing
                         NOTICE                               room and can also accommodate a portable
                                                              toilet (not  included).  WARNING! Carbon
                        252XE / 255XE / 255XD: This storage com-  monoxide (CO) can cause brain damage
                        partment contains a ballast tank. Be care-  or death. Carbon monoxide can be pres-
                        ful not to store items in this area that could  ent in this compartment. Signs of carbon
                        be crushed or might damage the ballast  monoxide  poisoning include nausea,
                        tank.                                 headache,  dizziness, drowsiness, and
                                                              lack of consciousness. Get fresh air if any-
                        The rear underseat storage compartment
                                                              one shows signs of carbon monoxide poi-
                        (port) is located under the rear port seat.
                                                              soning.
                        To open the rear underseat storage compart-
                                                              To open the enclosed head compartment:
                        ment (port), lift the rear port seat up.
                                                              (1) Pull the lock handle out.
                                                              (2) Turn the lock handle clockwise, and then
                                                                 open the enclosed head  compartment
                           1                                     door.






                                                                      1

                        1  Rear port seat
                                                                                           2

                                                              1  Lock handle
                                                              2  Enclosed head compartment door
                                                1








                        1  Rear underseat storage compartment (port)



                                                                                             114]]></page><page Index="124"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 115  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                        Equipment operation

                                                              Driver’s side console compartment
                                                              The driver’s side console compartment is lo-
                                                              cated in front of the helm.
                                                              The driver’s side console compartment door
                                                              can be used as a partition in the front walk-
                                                              through.
                                                              To open the driver’s side console compart-
                                                              ment, unhook the driver’s side console com-
                                            1                 partment door latch.


                        1  Enclosed head compartment

                        There is the head compartment light in the
                        enclosed head compartment. To turn on the                      1
                        light, turn the head compartment light switch
                        to on position. To turn off the light, turn the
                        light switch to off position. NOTICE: Be sure                  2
                        the head compartment light is turned off
                        when no one is in the enclosed head com-
                        partment. Leaving the light on can  drain  1  Driver’s side console compartment door
                        the battery.                          2  Driver’s side console compartment door latch


                                                 1
                                                 2
                                                                                       1







                        1  Head compartment light switch
                        2  Head compartment light             1  Driver’s side console compartment

                        To close the enclosed head compartment:  To close the driver’s side console compart-
                        (1) Close  the enclosed head compartment  ment, close the  driver’s side console com-
                            door.                             partment  door, and then hook the latch to
                        (2) Turn the lock  handle counterclockwise  securely lock it in place.
                            and make sure that the door is securely
                            closed.
                        (3) Push the lock handle in.


                        115]]></page><page Index="125"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 116  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                                                                 Equipment operation

                        To  use the driver’s side console compart-
                        ment door as the partition:
                        (1) Unfold the door and guide the edge of it
                            into the channel on  the enclosed head
                            compartment.                                                  1


                                                       1


                                                       2
                                                              1  Stowable table





                        1  Edge
                        2  Channel
                        (2) To hold the door in place, hook the driv-
                            er’s side console compartment door                           1
                            latch to the metal tab on the front side of
                            the door.
                                                              1  Stowable table

                                                                Maximum weight limit:
                                                       2          9 kg (20 lb)
                                                              To stow the stowable table, lift the table and
                                                              place it in its original position.

                              1                               Glove compartment
                                                              The glove compartment is located in front of
                        1  Driver’s side console compartment door latch  the passenger’s seat.
                        2  Metal tab                          To open the glove compartment:
                                                              While pulling the glove compartment latch,
                        Stowable table                        pull the glove compartment lid to open it.
                        The stowable table is located in front of the
                        passenger’s seat.
                        To use the stowable table, pull the table and
                        lower it until it contacts the stoppers.




                                                                                             116]]></page><page Index="126"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 117  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                        Equipment operation

                                                              There is a cooler box under the galley storage
                                                        2     compartment.
                                                              To open the galley storage compartment:
                                                              Pull the galley storage compartment lid latch
                                                              to open the lid.




                                                   1                                        2
                                                               1
                        1  Glove compartment lid
                        2  Glove compartment latch


                                                               3
                                                              1  Galley storage compartment lid
                                                              2  Galley storage compartment lid latch
                                                    1         3  Cooler box

                                                              To close the galley storage compartment:
                                                              Close the galley storage compartment lid,
                                                              and then push it to securely lock it in place.

                                                              To extend the galley table:
                        1  Glove compartment
                                                              (1) Open the cushion at the rear of the gal-
                        To close the glove compartment:          ley, and lift up the galley table.
                        Close the glove compartment lid, and  then
                        push it to securely lock it in place.

                        Galley storage compartment (except
                        for AR250 / SX250)
                        The galley storage compartment is located to
                        the rearward of the driver’s seat.             1
                        There is a light inside the galley storage com-
                        partment.
                        The light is equipped with a motion detecting
                        sensor.                               1  Galley table
                        To turn the light on, open the galley storage
                        compartment lid. To turn the light off, close  (2) Align the edge of the cushion with the
                        the lid.                                 groove on the galley table.




                        117]]></page><page Index="127"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 118  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                                                                 Equipment operation















                                                                                              1
                                                              1  Wet storage compartment
                        To fold the galley table:
                        When installing the engine cover, simply re-  To close the wet storage compartment:
                        verse the steps for extension.        (1) Close the rear platform hatch.
                                                              (2) Turn the lock handles counterclockwise
                        Wet storage compartment                  and make sure that the hatch is securely
                        The wet storage compartment is located un-  closed.
                        der the swim platform.                (3) Push the lock handles down.
                        To open the wet storage compartment:  TIP:
                        (1) Pull the lock handles up.          The engines will not start if the rear plat-
                        TIP:                                   form hatch is not securely closed.
                        252S / 252SE / 252SD / 255XE / 255XD: The   252S / 252SE / 252SD / 255XE / 255XD:
                        lock handles are located under the swim plat-  Snap the buttons on the bottom of each
                        form seats.                            swim platform seat onto the button bases.
                        (2) Turn  the lock handles  clockwise, and
                            then open the rear platform hatch.  Stern storage compartments
                                                              The stern storage compartments are located
                                                1             behind the swim platform seat backrests.
                                                              To open a stern storage compartment, pull
                                                              the strap on the swim platform seat backrest.



                                                2





                        1  Rear platform hatch
                        2  Lock handle






                                                                                             118]]></page><page Index="128"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 119  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                        Equipment operation

                                                                        Walk-through
                                         1
                                                              Front walk-through
                                                              This boat has  a large  bow area where  two
                                                              adults can sit comfortably with their legs out-
                                                       2
                                                              stretched. The front  walk-through provides
                                                              easy access to the bow area from the cabin
                                                              area.

                                                                   1

                        1  Swim platform seat backrest
                        2  Strap








                                                              1  Front walk-through
                                                              Rear walk-through
                                                              The rear walk-through has a flat design so
                                                              that persons can easily board the boat from
                                              1
                                                              the stern area and access the stern area from
                        1  Stern storage compartment (starboard)  the cabin area.

                        To  close the stern storage compartment,                   1
                        place the backrest in its original position and
                        push it to securely lock it in place.









                                                              1  Rear walk-through











                        119]]></page><page Index="129"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 120  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                                                                 Equipment operation

                                    Windshield
                        The windshield can be opened and closed.
                                                                                          1
                             WARNING
                        To avoid injury, the windshield must be se-
                        cured when the boat is in motion.
                        To close the windshield:
                        To  close the windshield, Close the wind-
                        shield, and then turn the windshield latches
                        to the lock position.
                                                              1  Folding mirror

                                                              To adjust the mirror angle:
                                                              Loosen the upper lock knob, adjust the angle
                                                              of the mirror, and then tighten the knob.
                                                              252XE
                                1
                                                                      1




                        1  Windshield latch
                        To open the windshield, turn the windshield
                        latches to the unlock position, and then open
                        the windshield.

                                                              1  Upper lock knob
                        Folding mirror (252XE / 255XE /
                        255XD)                                255XE / 255XD
                        The mirror is installed on the driver’s side of
                                                                  1
                        the windshield.












                                                              1  Upper lock knob




                                                                                             120]]></page><page Index="130"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 121  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                        Equipment operation

                        To fold the mirror:                         Anchor light (AR250)
                        Loosen the lower lock knob, fold the mirror,  NOTICE
                        and then tighten the knob.
                        252XE                                 Do not attach a ski rope or other tow-rope
                                                              to the anchor light itself.  Otherwise, the
                                                              anchor light could be damaged.
                                                              The anchor light is located at the top center of
                             1                                the wakeboard tower. It is also the “all-
                                                              around” light for navigation at night or in low-
                                                              visibility conditions. (See pages 70 and 98 for
                                                              information on the anchor light on.)


                                                                                              1
                        1  Lower lock knob

                        255XE / 255XD
                                               1





                                                              1  Anchor light






                        1  Lower lock knob






















                        121]]></page><page Index="131"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 122  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                                                                 Equipment operation

                                   Anchor light               255XE / 255XD
                           (except for AR250 / SX250)                                 1
                        The anchor light is located at the top center of
                        the wakeboard tower. It is also the “all-
                        around” light for navigation at night or in low-
                        visibility conditions. (See page 98 for informa-
                        tion on the anchor light on.)
                        To use the anchor light:
                        252S / 252SE / 252SD / 252XE: Pull the lock
                        tab, raise the anchor light, and then move the
                        lock tab to its original position to lock the an-
                                                              1  Anchor light
                        chor light in place.
                        255XE  /  255XD: Unzip the bimini canvas
                                                              To store the anchor light:
                        opening, pull the lock tab, raise the anchor
                                                              252S / 252SE / 252SD / 252XE: Pull the lock
                        light, then move the lock tab to its original po-
                                                              tab, lower the anchor light, and then move
                        sition to lock the anchor light in place, and zip
                                                              the lock tab to its original position to lock the
                        up the zipper in the bimini canvas.
                                                              anchor light in place.
                                                              255XE / 255XD:  Unzip the  bimini  canvas
                                                              opening, pull the lock tab, lower the anchor
                                                              light, then move the lock tab to its original po-
                                                              sition to lock the anchor light in place, and zip
                                                              up the zipper in the bimini canvas.

                                                1




                        1  Lock tab

                        252S / 252SE / 252SD / 252XE
                                        1












                        1  Anchor light


                                                                                             122]]></page><page Index="132"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 123  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                        Equipment operation

                              Anchor light (SX250)            (3) Open the cap of the anchor light socket,
                        The boat is equipped with a removable an-  fit the protrusion on the anchor light into
                        chor light. It is also the “all-around” light for  the slot in the socket, and then install the
                        navigation at night or in low-visibility condi-  light into the socket.
                        tions. (See page 70 for information on the an-
                        chor light on.)
                        The anchor light is stored in the ski locker.                         3
                        To set up the anchor light:
                        (1) Open the ski locker. (See page 112.)




                                                                1                            2

                                                              1  Cap
                                                    1         2  Slot
                                                              3  Protrusion
                                                              (4) Fit the anchor light stopper into the an-
                                                                 chor light socket.
                        1  Ski locker
                        (2) Remove the anchor light from the anchor
                            light holder.                                                     1







                                  1
                                                  2
                                                              1  Anchor light stopper
                                                              To store the anchor light:
                                                              (1) Pull the anchor light stopper upward, re-
                        1  Anchor light holder
                                                                 move the anchor light, and then close the
                        2  Anchor light
                                                                 cap of the anchor light socket.
                                                              (2) Install the  anchor light into  the anchor
                                                                 light holder, and then close the ski lock-
                                                                 er.






                        123]]></page><page Index="133"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 124  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                                                                 Equipment operation

                                   Bow ladder                 To stow the bow ladder:
                        The bow ladder is located in the anchor stor-  (1) Open the anchor storage compartment
                        age compartment.                         lid.
                                                              (2) Raise the bow ladder, and then collapse
                                                                 it.
                                                              (3) Lower the bow ladder into the  anchor
                             2                                   storage compartment, and then slide it
                                                   1             rearward completely.
                                                              (4) Close the anchor storage compartment
                                                     3           lid.





                        1  Bow ladder
                        2  Bow ladder strap
                        3  Anchor storage compartment

                        To use the bow ladder:
                        (1) Open the anchor storage compartment
                            lid. (See page 111.)
                        (2) Slide the bow ladder toward the bow.
                        (3) Extend the bow ladder, and then flip the
                            ladder forward and lower it.
                        (4) Close the anchor storage compartment
                            lid to use it as a step.





                                                      1








                        1  Bow ladder









                                                                                             124]]></page><page Index="134"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 125  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                        Equipment operation

                                  Swim platform

                             WARNING
                        Stay away from the swim  platform  area
                        while the engines are  running. Exhaust
                        gases coming from underneath it contain
                        carbon monoxide, a  colorless, odorless
                        gas which may cause brain  damage or                        1
                        death when inhaled. Symptoms  include
                        nausea, dizziness, and drowsiness.
                        The swim platform area provides a place to  1  Stern ladder
                        stand or sit while putting on skis or a wake-
                                                              (2) Pull the stern ladder out completely, and
                        board, and includes a stern ladder to make
                                                                 then lower it.
                        boarding from the water easier.

                                                       1










                                                              To stow the stern ladder:
                        1  Swim platform
                                                              (1) Raise the stern ladder until it is horizon-
                        Stern ladder                             tal, and then push it forward completely.
                        The stern ladder is stored under  the swim  (2) Push the end of the stern ladder to fit it
                        platform.                                onto the hooks on the boat.
                        To use the stern ladder:
                        (1) Lift the end of the stern ladder to release
                            it from the hooks on the boat.







                                                                             1

                                                              1  Hook



                        125]]></page><page Index="135"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 126  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                                                                 Equipment operation

                        Swim platform shower (252S / 252SE /
                        252SD)
                                                                                         1
                             WARNING
                         Do not drink water from the shower han-
                          dle. Water in the shower tank is non-po-
                          table.
                         Do not use the  swim  platform  shower
                          when  the boat is  moving. Otherwise,
                          falling overboard may cause injury or
                          death.
                                                              1  Filler fitting cap
                         NOTICE
                                                              (3) Connect a standard garden hose to the
                         Clean the shower handle and hose with  filler fitting.
                          mild soap and water only. Never use sol-  (4) The tank is completely full when water
                          vent-based cleaners on the shower han-  flows out from the overflow vent on the
                          dle or hose.                           starboard side of the boat.
                         Drain the storage tank to less than half
                                                                Shower tank capacity:
                          full if the boat is to be stored or used in
                                                                  37.8 L (10.0 US gal, 8.3 Imp.gal)
                          freezing weather. Freezing  water  can
                          damage the tank.
                        The swim platform shower is located on the
                        swim platform.

                                                                                     1

                                                        1



                                                              1  Overflow vent

                                                              (5) Disconnect the garden hose from the fill-
                                                                 er fitting.
                        1  Swim platform shower cover
                                                              (6) Install the filler fitting cap securely.
                                                              (7) Close the rear platform hatch.
                        To fill the shower tank:
                        (1) Open the rear platform hatch. (See page
                            118.)
                        (2) Remove the filler fitting cap.




                                                                                             126]]></page><page Index="136"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 127  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                        Equipment operation

                        To use the shower:
                        (1) Tap the “Shower” button to select the
                            “Shower” button on the system control
                            screen to turn the shower pump on.
                                                                    2
                                                                                      1







                                                              1  Swim platform shower handle
                             Shower  Tower  Courtesy  Dock    2  Flow control button

                                1                             TIP:
                                                              The  shower can  provide up to 5.3 L
                        1  “Shower” button
                                                              (1.4 US gal,  1.2 Imp.gal) per minute  flow
                        (2) Open the swim platform shower cover.  through the retractable shower handle.

                                                              (4) Feed the shower handle hose back into
                                                                 the opening and place the swim platform
                                                                 shower handle in its cradle.
                                                        1
                                                              (5) Close the swim platform shower cover.
                                                              (6) Tap  the “Shower” button to select  the
                                                                 “Shower” button on the system control
                                                                 screen to turn the shower pump off.



                        1  Swim platform shower cover

                        (3) Lift the swim platform shower handle
                            and push the flow control button to dis-
                            charge water.
















                        127]]></page><page Index="137"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 128  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                                                                 Equipment operation

                        Remote control keypad                 The side table can be installed at the swim
                        The remote control keypad is located on the  platform.
                        starboard side of the swim platform.
                        For operating instructions, refer to the stereo
                        system owner’s manual included with your
                        boat.
                                                                   1

                                                       1





                                                              1  Side table
                                                              AR250 / SX250: This model can also be in-
                                                              stalled to the rearward of the driver’s seat.
                        1  Remote control keypad
                                                                                              1
                        Side table

                             WARNING
                        If  the side table is installed at the swim
                        platform, do not use the table while the en-
                        gines are running. Exhaust gases coming
                        from underneath the swim platform con-
                        tain carbon monoxide, a colorless, odor-
                        less gas which may cause brain damage
                                                              1  Side table
                        or death when inhaled. Symptoms include
                        nausea, dizziness, and drowsiness.

                         NOTICE
                        If  the side table is installed at the swim
                        platform, remove the side table before op-
                        erating the boat. Otherwise, the side table
                        may fall into the water.











                                                                                             128]]></page><page Index="138"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 129  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                        Equipment operation

                        To install the side table, slide the end of the  USB chargers
                        table pole into  the table bracket until it is  There are the USB chargers on the deck. The
                        locked in place.                      USB charger can be used to charge external
                                                              devices.







                                                                                     1
                          3
                                                  2
                                        1
                        1  Table bracket
                        2  Table pole                         1  USB charger
                        3  Table bracket knob

                        To remove the side table, pull the table brack-
                        et knob, and then pull the table pole upward.

                        Accessory outlet
                        The 12 V DC outlet is shown in the following
                        illustration.
                         NOTICE                                 1
                        Do not use an automotive cigarette lighter
                        or other accessories that get hot because
                        the outlet can be damaged.            1  USB charger

                                                      1



                                                     12V







                        1  12 V DC outlet





                        129]]></page><page Index="139"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 130  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                                                                 Equipment operation

                                Wireless charger              Ballast (252XE / 255XE / 255XD)
                        This boat is equipped with the wireless char-  This model is equipped with a ballast system.
                        gers.                                 The ballast bag is equipped in the ski locker.
                        A smartphone that supports wireless charg-  The ballast tanks are equipped under the rear
                        ing will be charged when placed on the wire-  starboard seat and rear port seat.
                        less charger.                         To add potassium chloride or hot water to the
                                                              tank as a measure against AIS (Aquatic Inva-
                                                              sive Species), remove the cap at the top of
                                             1
                                                              the tank and add potassium chloride or hot
                                                              water.

                                                                            1




                                                               2
                        1  Wireless charger




                                                              1  Ballast tank
                                                              2  Cap




                                                                             2
                                                                                     1









                                                              1  Ballast tank
                                                              2  Cap











                                                                                             130]]></page><page Index="140"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 131  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                        Equipment operation

                                Wakeboard tower               NOTICE
                                (except for SX250)
                                                              Do not modify the wakeboard tower to tow
                        The wakeboard tower is provided as an ele-
                                                              from it or to carry accessories not de-
                        vated tow point suitable for wakeboards and
                                                              signed for it. The wakeboard tower could
                        similar towable recreational equipment. The
                                                              be damaged. Also, the wakeboard tower
                        tow pylon can be used to attach a standard
                                                              collapsing feature is intended for storage
                        ski rope or other tow-rope.
                                                              only. The boat should not be transported
                                                              or  operated with  the tower in  the col-
                                                              lapsed position.
                                                              Collapsing and setting up the
                                                              wakeboard tower
                                                              (AR250 / 252S / 252XE)
                                                              When  storing the boat,  collapse the  wake-
                                                              board tower.
                                                              NOTICE

                                                               Accidentally  dropping the wakeboard
                             WARNING                           tower while collapsing or raising it can
                                                               damage the tower, the boat, or both. An
                        Severe injury or death can result if you ig-
                                                               assistant needs to help hold the wake-
                        nore any of the following:
                                                               board tower in place during the proce-
                         Maximum towing capacity:
                                                               dure.
                          1 Person, 158 kg (350 lb) max.
                                                               Do not operate the boat or transport it
                         Make sure the tow-rope is securely fas-
                                                               on the trailer with the tower in the col-
                          tened to  the  tow  pylon on the wake-
                                                               lapsed position to avoid possible dam-
                          board tower.
                                                               age.
                         Do  not  tow a tube or other inflatable
                          from the wakeboard tower. Use the ski
                          tow hook on the transom.
                         Stay clear of the tow-rope while pulling
                          a wakeboard rider or skier.
                         Do not climb, hang, or sit on the wake-
                          board tower.
                         Make sure all knobs or pins securing the
                          wakeboard tower are tightened  before
                          operation and check periodically during
                          use.






                        131]]></page><page Index="141"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 132  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                                                                 Equipment operation

                        To collapse the wakeboard tower:      Collapsing and setting up the
                        (1) 252XE: Fold the mirror. (See page 120 for  wakeboard tower (252SE / 252SD /
                            information on folding the mirror.)  255XE / 255XD)
                        (2) While an assistant supports the wake-  When  storing the boat,  collapse the  wake-
                            board tower, completely loosen the lock  board tower.
                            knobs on both sides of the wakeboard  NOTICE
                            tower.
                                                               Accidentally dropping the  upper tower
                                                               section while collapsing or raising it can
                                               1
                                                      2        damage the tower, the boat, or both. As-
                                                               sistants need to support the upper tow-
                                                               er section during the procedure.
                                                               Do not operate the boat or transport it
                                                               on the trailer with the tower in the col-
                                                               lapsed position to avoid possible dam-
                                                               age.
                                                              To collapse the wakeboard tower:
                        1  Wakeboard tower                    (1) Remove the lock knob securing the bimi-
                        2  Lock knob                             ni top to the wakeboard tower.
                        (3) Lower the wakeboard tower until it
                            stops.



                                                                                               1






                                                              1  Lock knob

                                                              (2) While assistants  support the wake-
                                                                 board tower and bimini top, hold down
                        To set up the wakeboard tower:           the lock lever and remove the latch on
                        (1) Lift the wakeboard tower.            both sides of the wakeboard tower.
                        (2) While an assistant supports the wake-
                            board tower, tighten the lock knobs on
                            both sides of the wakeboard tower until
                            they stop.





                                                                                             132]]></page><page Index="142"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 133  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                        Equipment operation

                                                                          Bimini top
                                1
                                                                   (AR250 / 252S / 252XE)
                                                              Setting up the bimini top
                                                              To set up the bimini top:
                               2                              (1) Remove the storage cover, and then un-
                                                                 wrap the bimini top.

                                                                          1



                        1  Lock lever
                        2  Latch

                        (3) Lower the wakeboard tower until it
                            stops.
                        To set up the wakeboard tower:
                        (1) Lift the wakeboard tower.
                                                              1  Storage cover
                        (2) While assistants support the  wake-
                            board tower and bimini top, install the
                                                              (2) Pull the front of the bimini top toward the
                            latch on both sides of the wakeboard
                                                                 bow, and then open the flap and pull out
                            tower.
                                                                 the front support poles from the bimini
                                                                 top.

                                                                                  1
                                  1






                                                                                     2
                        1  Latch

                                                              1  Front support pole
                        (3) Tighten the lock knob to secure the bimi-
                                                              2  Flap
                            ni top to the wakeboard tower.










                        133]]></page><page Index="143"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 134  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                                                                 Equipment operation

                        (3) Insert the front support poles  into the  (5) Push the snap button and extend each
                            mounting holes in the wakeboard tower.  rear support pole to the long position.

                                                2
                                                                    1
                                                                    2

                                                                    3
                           1
                                                                    4
                                                                    5



                        1  Mounting hole                      1  Rear support pole
                        2  Front support pole                 2  Snap button
                                                              3  Short position
                        (4) Pull the rear of the bimini top toward the  4  Middle position
                            stern, and then unhook the rear support  5  Long position
                            poles from the main pole.
                                                              (6) Secure each rear support pole to the rear
                                                                 support pole mounting bracket using the
                                                                 lock pin.
                                              2                                         1



                                                                            2         3

                                        1

                        1  Rear support pole
                        2  Main pole

                                                              1  Rear support pole
                                                              2  Lock pin
                                                              3  Rear support pole mounting bracket













                                                                                             134]]></page><page Index="144"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 135  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                        Equipment operation

                        (7) While pulling the main pole down, push  Storing the bimini top
                            the snap button and shorten each rear  To store the bimini top:
                            support pole to either the middle position  (1) While pulling the main pole down slightly,
                            for cruising or to the short position if you  push the snap button, and then extend
                            are using the wakeboard tower. Be sure  each rear support pole to the long posi-
                            the snap buttons click into place.   tion to loosen the bimini top.


                             1                                        1

                             2
                                                                      2
                             3
                             4                                        3




                        1  Rear support pole                  1  Rear support pole
                        2  Short position                     2  Snap button
                        3  Middle position                    3  Long position
                        4  Snap button
                                                              (2) Remove each rear support pole from the
                         NOTICE                                  rear support pole mounting bracket by
                                                                 rotating the lock pin.
                         Do not exceed 72 km/h (45 mph) with the
                          bimini top in the up position.                                1
                         Be careful not to push the snap button
                          and extend the pole too far. Otherwise,
                          the lower section of the pole could fall          2         3
                          into the water.






                                                              1  Rear support pole
                                                              2  Lock pin
                                                              3  Rear support pole mounting bracket










                        135]]></page><page Index="145"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 136  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                                                                 Equipment operation

                        (3) Push the snap button and shorten each  (5) Remove the front support poles from the
                            rear support pole to the short position.  wakeboard tower, and  then  place the
                                                                 poles in the flap of the bimini top.

                                1
                                                                                     1

                                2

                                3




                        1  Rear support pole
                        2  Short position                     1  Front support pole
                        3  Snap button
                                                              (6) Pull the front of the bimini top toward the
                         NOTICE                                  stern, wrap the bimini top around the
                                                                 main pole, and then install the storage
                        Be careful not to push the snap button and
                                                                 cover.
                        extend the pole too far.  Otherwise, the
                        lower section of the pole could fall into the
                                                              Trailering with the bimini top
                        water.
                                                              The bimini top must be secured to the boat
                        (4) Hook the rear  support  poles onto the  when it is being trailered. When the boat is
                            main pole, and then pull the rear of the  trailered with a genuine Yamaha boat cover,
                            bimini top toward the bow.        simply store the bimini top in the fully col-
                                                              lapsed position and install the storage cover.
                                                              If a boat cover is not used, wrap an elastic
                                                              cord around the top and secure the ends to
                                                              the tow pylon on the wakeboard tower to re-
                                              2
                                                              strict movement.
                           1
                                                              Removing the bimini top
                                                              To remove the bimini top:
                                                              (1) Store the bimini top. See “Storing the bi-
                                                                 mini top”.
                                                              (2) While supporting the bimini top, rotate
                        1  Rear support pole
                                                                 the lock pins securing the main pole to
                        2  Main pole
                                                                 the wakeboard tower, and then remove
                                                                 the top.





                                                                                             136]]></page><page Index="146"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 137  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                        Equipment operation

                                                                Bimini top (252SE / 252SD /
                                    1                                  255XE / 255XD)
                                                              Removing the bimini top
                                                              To remove the bimini top:
                                                              (1) Open both flaps on each side of the bimi-
                                                                 ni top.


                            2
                                                                                1

                        1  Bimini top
                        2  Lock pin

                        Installing the bimini top
                        To install the bimini top:
                        When installing the bimini top, simply reverse
                        the removal steps, and then make sure that
                                                              1  Flap
                        the lock pins are securely installed.
                                                              (2) Loosen the ratchet, and then loosen the
                                                                 strap securing the bimini top.


                                                                         1







                                                                   2



                                                              1  Ratchet
                                                              2  Flap

                                                              (3) Open the flaps at the front and rear of the
                                                                 bimini top and release the buckles.











                        137]]></page><page Index="147"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 138  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                                                                 Equipment operation

                                                                     Bimini top (SX250)
                                                              Setting up the bimini top
                                                              To set up the bimini top:
                                              1               (1) Raise the  bimini top,  and then unhook
                                                                 the rear  support poles from the main
                                                                 pole.



                                 2

                        1  Buckle
                        2  Flap                                                  1

                        (4) Slowly pull the bimini top toward the bow
                            and remove it.

                        Installing the bimini top
                                                              1  Rear support pole
                        To install the bimini top:
                        When installing the bimini top, simply reverse  (2) Secure each rear support pole to the rear
                        the removal steps.                       support pole mounting bracket using the
                                                                 lock pin. Make sure that the tab on the
                                                                 end of the lock pin is pointing downward.



                                                                 1




                                                                     2

                                                                                  3

                                                              1  Rear support pole
                                                              2  Rear support pole mounting bracket
                                                              3  Lock pin











                                                                                             138]]></page><page Index="148"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 139  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                        Equipment operation

                        (3) Remove the storage cover, unfold the bi-  (5) Tighten the front straps so that the top is
                            mini top, and pull it toward the bow.  snug and wrinkle free.



                                      1










                        1  Storage cover
                                                              NOTICE
                        (4) Hook the latch on each front strap onto
                            the strap eye.                    Do not exceed 72 km/h (45 mph) with the
                                                              bimini top in the up position.

                                  1                           Storing the bimini top in the upright
                                                              position
                                                              NOTICE
                               2
                                                              Do not trailer the boat with the bimini top
                              3                               in the fully extended or upright position.
                                                              When transporting the boat, put the bimini
                                                              top in the fully collapsed position to avoid
                        1  Front strap                        damage.
                        2  Latch
                        3  Strap eye




















                        139]]></page><page Index="149"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 140  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                                                                 Equipment operation

                        To store the bimini top in the upright position:  poles to the rear support pole mounting
                        (1) Loosen each front strap, and then un-  brackets, and then hook each rear sup-
                            hook the latch from the strap eye.   port pole onto the main pole.


                                   1




                                                                                          1
                                2
                              3

                        1  Front strap                        1  Rear support pole
                        2  Latch
                        3  Strap eye                          (3) Install  the protective cushions around
                                                                 the poles, and then lower the bimini top
                        (2) Pull the bimini top toward the stern, and  onto the rear deck.
                            then fold it.


                                                        1                     2


                                                                     1






                                                              1  Protective cushion
                        1  Bimini top                         2  Bimini top

                        (3) Install the storage cover.        Trailering with the bimini top
                                                              The bimini top must be secured to the boat
                        Storing the bimini top in the fully   when it is being trailered. When the boat is
                        collapsed position                    trailered with a genuine Yamaha boat cover,
                        To store the bimini top in the fully collapsed  simply store the bimini top in the fully col-
                        position:                             lapsed position and install the storage cover.
                        (1) Follow the above steps for “Storing the  If a boat cover is not used, wrap an elastic
                            bimini top in the upright position”.  cord around the top and secure the ends to
                        (2) While supporting the bimini top, remove  the ski tow hook to restrict movement.
                            the lock pins securing the rear support


                                                                                             140]]></page><page Index="150"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 141  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                        Equipment operation

                        Removing the bimini top
                        To remove the bimini top:
                        (1) Store the bimini top. See “Storing the bi-
                            mini top in the fully collapsed position”.
                        (2) Remove the lock pins securing the bimini
                            top to the main pole mounting brackets.


                                             1











                        1  Lock pin
                        (3) Remove the bimini top from the boat.


                        Installing the bimini top
                        To install the bimini top:
                        When installing the bimini top, simply reverse
                        the removal steps, and then make sure that
                        the lock pins are securely installed.


























                        141]]></page><page Index="151"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 142  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                                         Operation and handling requirements

                                Fuel requirement              pinging) occurs, use a gasoline of a different
                        Fuel                                  brand.
                             WARNING                            Recommended fuel (except for 255XE /
                                                                255XD):
                         Gasoline and  gasoline vapors are ex-
                                                                  Regular unleaded gasoline with a
                          tremely flammable. To avoid  fires  and
                                                                  minimum octane rating of 86
                          explosions and to reduce the risk of in-
                                                                  (Pump octane number) = (R + M)/2
                          jury when refueling, follow these in-
                                                                  90 (Research octane number)
                          structions.
                         Gasoline is poisonous and can cause in-
                                                                Recommended fuel (255XE / 255XD):
                          jury or death. Handle gasoline with care.
                                                                  Premium  unleaded gasoline with a
                          Never siphon gasoline by mouth. If you
                                                                  minimum octane rating of 91 (Pump
                          should swallow some gasoline, inhale a
                                                                  octane  number) = (R + M)/2 95 (Re-
                          lot of gasoline vapor, or get some gaso-
                                                                  search octane number)
                          line in your eyes, see your doctor imme-
                          diately. If gasoline spills on  your skin,
                          wash with soap and water. If gasoline  Gasohol
                          spills  on your clothing, change  your  There are two types of gasohol: gasohol con-
                          clothes.                            taining ethanol and that containing methanol.
                                                              Gasohol  containing ethanol can  be used  if
                         NOTICE                               ethanol content does not exceed 10% and
                         Do  not  use leaded gasoline. Leaded  the fuel meets minimum octane ratings. E-85
                          gasoline can seriously damage the en-  is a fuel blend containing 85% ethanol and
                          gines.                              therefore must not be used in this boat. All
                         Avoid getting water and contaminants in  ethanol blends containing more than  10%
                          the  fuel  tank. Contaminated fuel can  ethanol can cause fuel system damage or en-
                          cause poor performance  and engine  gine performance problems.
                          damage. Use only fresh  gasoline that  Yamaha does not recommend gasohol con-
                          has been stored in clean containers.  taining methanol because it can cause fuel
                         255XE / 255XD: Use only gasoline with a  system damage  and engine performance
                          minimum pump octane number of 91 or  problems.
                          a minimum research octane number of  To fill the fuel tank:
                          95. Low-octane gasoline can seriously  (1) Before refueling, turn off  the  engines.
                          damage the engine.                     Never refuel while smoking, or while in
                                                                 the vicinity of sparks, open  flames, or
                        255XE  /  255XD: Your Yamaha engine has  other sources of ignition.
                        been  designed  to use premium unleaded  (2) Refuel the boat in a well-ventilated area.
                        gasoline with a pump octane  number      If the boat is in the water, be sure it is se-
                        [(R+M)/2] of 91 or higher, or a research oc-  curely  moored to the  fueling dock. All
                        tane number of 95 or higher. If knocking (or  passengers must be out of the boat dur-
                                                                 ing refueling.


                                                                                             142]]></page><page Index="152"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 143  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                        Operation and handling requirements

                        (3) Press the fuel tank filler cap button, and  and other fuel system components clean for
                            then open the fuel tank filler cap.  proper performance and longer engine life.








                                               1



                                               2
                        1  Fuel tank filler cap
                        2  Fuel tank filler cap button

                        (4) Slowly add fuel to the fuel tank.
                          Fuel tank capacity:
                            284 L (75.0 US gal, 62.5 Imp.gal)
                        (5) Stop filling when the fuel just becomes
                            visible in the bottom of the filler tube. Do
                            not “top off” the tank, because gasoline
                            could spill out.
                        (6) Wipe up any spilled fuel immediately.
                        (7) Close the fuel tank filler cap by pushing it
                            until it locks in place. Make sure that the
                            fuel tank filler cap is securely closed.
                        Engine Med RX Fuel Additive
                        As the fuel mixture burns in your engine’s
                        combustion chambers, carbon deposits are
                        left behind. Over time, these deposits can re-
                        duce performance  and even  cause engine
                        damage. Marine engines tend to run at lower
                        operating temperatures than other engines,
                        making them more likely to accumulate these
                        harmful deposits. Engine Med RX, available
                        from your Yamaha Boat Dealer, is formulated
                        to remove existing deposits and, when used
                        continuously, prevent new ones from form-
                        ing, while also helping to keep fuel injectors




                        143]]></page><page Index="153"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 144  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                                         Operation and handling requirements

                             Engine oil requirement           4-star models
                        Engine oil
                         NOTICE
                        Use only 4-stroke engine oil. Usage of 2-
                        stroke engine oil could result in severe en-
                        gine damage.

                        Select an oil grade according to the average
                        temperatures in the area where the boat will
                        be used.
                          Recommended engine oil:             TIP:
                            YAMALUBE 4W                       When the engine is operated at high speeds,
                          Recommended engine oil type:        some engine oil may be consumed. Be sure
                            SAE 10W-30, 10W-40, 20W-40, 20W-  to check the engine oil level.
                            50
                          Recommended engine oil grade        Why Yamalube
                          (3-star models):                    YAMALUBE oil is a Genuine YAMAHA Part
                            API SG or higher                  born of the engineers’ passion and belief that
                          Recommended engine oil grade        engine oil is an important liquid engine com-
                          (4-star models):                    ponent. We form teams of specialists in the
                            API SJ or higher                  fields of mechanical engineering, chemistry,
                                                              electronics and track testing, and have them
                        3-star models
                                                              develop the engine together with the oil it will
                                                              use. Yamalube oils take full advantage of the
                                                              base oil’s qualities and blend in the ideal bal-
                                                              ance of additives to make sure the final oil
                                                              clears our performance standards. Thus,
                                                              Yamalube mineral, semisynthetic and syn-
                                                              thetic oils have their own distinct characters
                                                              and value. Yamaha’s experience gained over
                                                              many  years of  research and development
                                                              into oil  since the 1960’s  helps  make
                                                              Yamalube the best choice for your Yamaha
                                                              engine.












                                                                                             144]]></page><page Index="154"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 145  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                        Operation and handling requirements

                        Checking the engine oil               1800 cc engine models (4-star)
                             WARNING
                        Engine oil is extremely hot immediately af-             1
                        ter the engines are turned off. Coming in
                        contact with or getting any engine oil on
                        your clothes could result in burns.
                         NOTICE

                        Make sure debris and water do not enter
                        the oil filler hole. Debris and water in the
                        engine oil can cause serious engine dam-  1  Dipstick
                        age.
                                                              1900 cc engine models
                        To check the engine oil level:
                        (1) Place the boat in a precisely level posi-
                            tion on land with the engine stopped. If
                            the engine was running, allow the engine
                            oil to settle by waiting 5 minutes or more
                            before checking the oil level.
                                                              1
                        (2) Open the engine hood. (See page 111.)
                        (3) Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean.
                        1800 cc engine models (3-star)

                                                              1  Dipstick

                                                              (4) Insert the dipstick back into the dipstick
                                                                 tube  completely. Remove the  dipstick
                                                                 again and check that the engine oil level
                          1                                      is between the minimum level mark and
                                                                 maximum level mark.


                        1  Dipstick














                        145]]></page><page Index="155"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 146  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                                         Operation and handling requirements

                        3-star models                         1800 cc models

                                                                                       1
                                                1
                                                   2








                        1  Maximum level mark                 1  Engine oil filler cap
                        2  Minimum level mark
                                                              1900 cc engine models
                        4-star models


                                                               1
                                                 1
                                                   2





                                                              1  Engine oil filler cap
                        1  Maximum level mark
                        2  Minimum level mark                 (7) Slowly add engine oil.
                                                              (8) Wait approximately 5 minutes to allow
                        (5) If the  engine oil  level is significantly  the engine oil to settle, and then check
                            above the maximum level mark, consult  the engine oil level again.
                            a Yamaha Boat Dealer. If the engine oil  (9) Repeat steps 3–8 until the engine oil is at
                            level is below the minimum level mark,  the proper level.
                            add engine oil.                   (10) Install the engine oil filler cap.
                        (6) Remove the engine oil filler cap.  (11) Repeat the checking oil level procedure
                                                                 for the other engine.
                                                              (12) Close the engine hood.











                                                                                             146]]></page><page Index="156"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 147  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                        Operation and handling requirements

                            Draining the bilge water          Engine compartment
                                                              1800 cc engine models
                         NOTICE
                         Do  not  run the engines at full throttle
                          when bilge water remains in the engine
                          compartment. The bilge water can
                          splash into the engines, which can result                      1
                          in severe damage.
                         Be sure all drain plugs are tightened be-
                          fore  operating your boat. Otherwise,
                          water may flood the boat and cause it to
                          submerge.
                                                              1  Engine compartment drain plug

                        Draining the bilge water on land      1900 cc engine models
                        This model is equipped with multiple  drain
                        plugs.
                        Bilge water from the various compartments
                        flows through drain passages and collects in
                        the bottom of the hull. The bilge water can be
                        drained from the boat by removing the hull                       1
                        drain plugs.

                        Ski locker

                                                              1  Engine compartment drain plug

                                                              To drain the bilge water from the hull:
                                                              Remove the  hull drain plug at  the stern  to
                                                              drain the water. Check the condition of the O-
                                                              ring on the hull drain plug, and then securely
                                             1                install the drain plug.



                        1  Drain plug












                        147]]></page><page Index="157"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 148  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                                         Operation and handling requirements

                                                              When the “Bilge” button is tapped, the bilge
                                                              pump will operate.


                                                                                     SE
                                                                FUEL
                                                                100 %
                                                                    19
                                                                           x1000 rpm

                                                                   START
                                                  1                13.0  V  9
                                                                             Bilge  Blower
                        1  Hull drain plug
                                                                             1
                        Draining the bilge water on water     1  “Bilge” button
                        This model is equipped with a self-draining
                        deck and bilge pump to drain the bilge water  Except for 255XE / 255XD
                        on water.

                        Self-draining deck
                        Most water that enters the deck area drains
                        automatically out the stern through the large
                        drain hole in the deck.
                        A one-way check valve in the drain prevents
                        water from traveling back to the deck while
                        the boat is moored or moving in reverse.                             1

                        Bilge pump                            1  Bilge pump outlet
                        Your boat is equipped with a drainage sys-
                        tem that channels water that enters the boat  255XE / 255XD
                        from the storage compartments to the bilge
                        under the engine compartment.









                                                                                           1
                                                              1  Bilge pump outlet






                                                                                             148]]></page><page Index="158"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 149  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                        Operation and handling requirements


                        TIP:                                  TIP:
                         252S / 252SE / 252SD / 255XE / 255XD:  When the bilge pump operates automatically,
                          The “BILGE” switch light comes on while  the bilge pump will not stop until most of the
                          the bilge pump is operating.        bilge water is drained.
                        252S



                                                    1









                        1  “BILGE” switch

                        252SE / 252SD / 255XE / 255XD



                                                   1









                        1  “BILGE” switch

                         The bilge pump will operate every 2 min-
                          utes automatically, even if the “Bilge” but-
                          ton is not tapped.

                        Even if the “Bilge” button is not tapped to op-
                        erate the bilge pump, the bilge pump will de-
                        tect when there is excessive water in the bilge
                        and will automatically drain most of it through
                        the bilge pump outlet. This  function works
                        automatically, even if the battery switches are
                        turned to the off position.



                        149]]></page><page Index="159"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 150  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                                                                   First-time operation

                                 Engine break-in                      Engine break-in
                           (except for 255XE / 255XD)                 (255XE / 255XD)
                         NOTICE                               NOTICE

                        Failure to perform the engine break-in  Failure to  perform the engine break-in
                        could result in reduced engine life or even  could result in reduced engine life or even
                        severe engine damage.                 severe engine damage.

                        The engine break-in period is essential to al-  The engine break-in period is essential to al-
                        low the various components of the engines to  low the various components of the engines to
                        wear and polish themselves to the correct  wear and polish themselves to the correct
                        operating clearances. This ensures proper  operating clearances. This ensures proper
                        performance and promotes longer compo-  performance and promotes  longer  compo-
                        nent life.                            nent life.
                        (1) Check the engine oil level. (See page 145  (1) Check the engine oil level. (See page 145
                            for information on checking  the  engine  for information on checking the engine
                            oil level.)                          oil level.)
                        (2) Launch the boat and start the engines.  (2) Launch the boat and start the engines.
                            (See page 165 for information on starting  (See page 165 for information on starting
                            the engines.)                        the engines.)
                        (3) For the first 5 minutes, operate with the  (3) For the first 5 minutes, operate with the
                            engines at trolling speed.           engines speed below 2000 r/min.
                        (4) For the next 30 minutes, operate with the  (4) For the next 90 minutes, operate with the
                            engines speed below 5000 r/min.      engines speed below 5000 r/min.
                        (5) For the next 1 hour, operate with the en-  After the engine break-in is complete,  the
                            gines speed below 6000 r/min.     boat can be operated normally.
                        After the engine break-in is complete, the
                        boat can be operated normally.























                                                                                             150]]></page><page Index="160"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 151  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                        Pre-operation checks


                             WARNING
                        Failure to inspect or maintain the boat properly increases the possibility of an accident
                        or damage to the boat. Do not operate the boat if you find any problem.
                        If a problem cannot be corrected by the procedures provided in this manual, have the
                        boat inspected by a Yamaha Boat Dealer.

                        Pre-operation checklist
                        Before operating this boat, perform the checks in the following checklist. Always follow the inspec-
                        tion and maintenance procedures and schedules described in this owner’s/operator’s manual.
                        Pre-operation checks should be made each time the boat is used. These checks can be com-
                        pleted in a short time. It is worth the time spent to ensure safety and reliability.
                                 ITEM                          CHECK                     PAGE
                         PRE-LAUNCH CHECKS
                         Steering system       Check for proper steering operation.       152
                         Remote control levers  Check for proper throttle operation.      152
                                               Check for proper shift operation.
                         Throttle/shift paddles   Check for proper operation.             153
                         (252SD / 255XD)
                         Fire extinguisher     Check readiness of the extinguisher.       154
                         Hull                  Check hull for damage and cracks before launching.  —
                         Access port caps      Check for proper installation.             156
                         Jet intakes           Check that no debris is in the intakes before launching.  156
                         Fuel system           Check fuel system for leaks.               156
                         Engine oil level      Check engine oil level; add as necessary.  145
                         Batteries             Check battery condition, mounting, and connection.  158
                         Bilge water           Check the engine compartment for bilge water.  158
                         Drain plug            Check the drain plug for damage and foreign material   158
                                               and check that they are securely installed.
                         Engine compartment and   Open the engine hood and check to be sure no gasoline,   159
                         blowers               gasoline vapors, or loose electrical connections are
                                               present. Operate the blowers for at least 4 minutes.
                         Engine hood           Check that the hood latch is secure.       111
                         Lights and horn       Check lights to be sure they operate. Push the horn but-  160, 161
                                               ton to be sure it operates.
                         Engine shut-off cord (lan-  Check the engine shut-off cord (lanyard) for damage.  162
                         yard)
                         Tower and Bimini top  Check that the tower fasteners are secured.  131, 132
                                               Check that the top is secure.
                         POST-LAUNCH CHECKS
                         Switches              Check operation of the main switches and engine shut-  163
                                               off switch.
                         Cooling water pilot outlets  Check that water comes out while the engines are running.  163
                         Fuel level            Check fuel level; add as necessary.        164
                        The steering and shifting pre-operation checks will require two persons: one person to oper-
                        ate the controls and one person to observe the proper operation at the stern.

                        151]]></page><page Index="161"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 152  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                                                                Pre-operation checks

                           Pre-operation check points         erwise, the engines could overheat and/or
                        Pre-launch checks                     seize.
                        Perform the pre-launch checks in the pre-op-
                        eration checklist while the boat is on land.

                        Steering system checks
                        Make sure the steering wheel is not loose.
                        There should not be any free play, either in-
                        and-out or in rotation. Turn the steering wheel
                        fully to the right and left to make sure opera-                  1
                                                                   1
                        tion is smooth  and unrestricted throughout                 2
                        the whole range.
                                                              1  Jet thrust nozzle
                                                              2  Articulating keel (except for 252SD / 255XD)

                                                              Remote control lever checks
                                                                  WARNING
                                                              Do not touch the shift gates while the re-
                                                              mote control levers are being operated,
                                          1                   otherwise, you could be pinched.

                                                              Operate the remote control levers several
                        1  Steering wheel                     times to make sure that operation is smooth
                                                              throughout the whole range.
                        Make sure both jet thrust nozzles change di-
                        rections as the steering wheel is turned. The
                        jet thrust nozzles should point to starboard
                        (right) when the wheel is turned to the right.
                        The jet thrust  nozzles should point to port
                        (left) when the wheel is turned to the left.
                        There should not be free play between the
                        steering wheel and the jet thrust nozzles.
                        Except for 252SD / 255XD: In addition, check
                        that  the direction of the articulating  keel
                        changes according to the movement of the
                        jet thrust nozzles.
                        252SD / 255XD: Start the engines, and then
                        check the steering system. NOTICE: Do not
                        run the engines over 4000 r/min on land.
                        Also, do not run the engines for more than
                        15 seconds without supplying water, oth-


                                                                                             152]]></page><page Index="162"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 153  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                        Pre-operation checks

                                                              Fully open position
                                         N
                               F  2  5   1    5    R            1
                                3                 4
                             7                        7
                                       6     6
                          8                              8      2





                        1  Neutral position
                        2  TDE position                       1  Shift gate
                        3  Forward position                   2  Jet thrust nozzle
                        4  Reverse position
                        5  Shift                              Check that the shift gates are in the fully
                        6  Fully closed                       closed position when the remote control le-
                        7  Throttle                           vers are in the reverse position.
                        8  Fully open                         Fully closed position

                        252SE  / 252SD / 252XE / 255XE  / 255XD:
                        Start the engines before performing the fol-  1
                        lowing checks. NOTICE: Do not run the en-
                        gines over 4000 r/min on land. Also, do not
                        run the engines for more than 15 seconds
                        without  supplying water, otherwise, the
                        engines could overheat and/or seize.
                        Check that the shift gates are slightly above
                        the shift gate neutral position when the re-
                        mote control levers are in the forward posi-
                                                              1  Shift gate
                        tion, and that the shift gates are in the fully  Throttle/shift paddle checks (252SD /
                        open position when the remote control levers  255XD)
                        are moved farther forward.            Operate  the throttle/shift paddles several
                                                              times to make sure that operation is smooth
                                                              throughout the whole range. Also, make sure
                                                              that the throttle/shift paddles return automat-
                                                              ically to  their original positions  when re-
                                                              leased.









                        153]]></page><page Index="163"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 154  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                                                                Pre-operation checks



                                  1










                                  1
                        1  Throttle/shift paddle              Except for 255XE / 255XD: If you choose to
                                                              have two fire extinguishers, the other fire ex-
                        Fire extinguisher check               tinguisher is to be mounted in the rear under-
                        As an inboard boat less than 26 feet in length,  seat storage compartment (port).
                        your boat must be fitted with one 5-B (B-1)  255XE / 255XD:  If you choose to have two
                        type fire extinguisher when navigating waters  fire extinguishers, the other fire extinguisher
                        controlled by the U.S. Coast Guard. In addi-  is to be mounted in the enclosed head com-
                        tion, most state  and local boating laws  re-  partment. There is a location label outside the
                        quire that the craft carry a USCG-approved  compartment. This fire extinguisher located
                        fire extinguisher whenever the boat is operat-  near  the  engine compartment should be a
                        ed.                                   “clean agent” type designed to displace oxy-
                        Make  sure at least one fire extinguisher is  gen, with an inert gas, such as CO , or FE-
                                                                                          2
                        aboard and full; two fire extinguishers are  36™, and have a capacity of five pounds or
                        recommended. See the instructions supplied  more.
                        by the extinguisher  manufacturer to deter-  Except for 255XE / 255XD
                        mine the indication of the condition.
                        A fire extinguisher is not standard equipment
                        with this boat. If you do not have a fire extin-
                        guisher, contact your local  Yamaha Boat
                        Dealer  or fire extinguisher dealer for one
                        meeting the proper specifications.


                        Storing the fire extinguisher
                        One fire extinguisher is to be mounted in the
                        driver’s side console compartment. The fire
                        extinguisher recommended for this location
                        is a chemical-type extinguisher with a capac-
                        ity of two pounds or more.







                                                                                             154]]></page><page Index="164"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 155  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                        Pre-operation checks

                        255XE / 255XD                         A FIRE-PORT™ is mounted below the engine
                                                              hood. Use this port to spray the contents of a
                                                              fire extinguisher into the engine compartment
                                                              if  a fire breaks out  in  the engine area.
                                                              WARNING! If there is a fire in the engine
                                                              compartment, opening the hatch will add
                                                              more oxygen to the fire, increasing the risk
                                                              of a larger fire or an explosion.
                                                              If you see smoke or otherwise suspect a fire,
                                                              you can look through the transparent flaps of
                                                              the FIRE-PORT™ to look for signs of flames.
                                                              If there is a fire, push the nozzle of the fire ex-
                        Operating the fire extinguisher       tinguisher through the FIRE-PORT™ and fol-
                        A  chemical-type fire extinguisher may not  low the manufacturer’s instructions to empty
                        help when sprayed into the engine compart-  the contents of the fire extinguisher into the
                        ment through the FIRE-PORT™ because that  engine compartment.
                        type needs to be aimed directly at the base of  A “clean agent” type fire extinguisher is rec-
                        the flames to be  effective. See below  for  ommended; a chemical-type fire extinguisher
                        FIRE-PORT™ information.               may not be adequate in this application.









                                                1




                        1  FIRE-PORT™



















                        155]]></page><page Index="165"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 156  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                                                                Pre-operation checks

                        Access port cap check
                        Make sure that the access port caps are se-
                        curely installed.
                        To check the access port caps:
                        (1) Open the rear platform hatch. (See page
                            118 for information on the rear platform
                            hatch.)
                        (2) Make sure that the access port caps are     1
                            securely installed. If they are removed or
                            are  not locked, securely install  them.
                            (See page 207 for information on the ac-  1  Jet intake
                            cess port caps.)
                                                              In some cases, the engines may overheat be-
                                                              cause of a lack of cooling water, and damage
                                                              could result.  If the jet  intakes are clogged,
                                                      1
                                                              clean them. (See page 207 for information on
                                                              the jet intakes.) WARNING! Rotating parts
                                                              could cause severe injury or death. Before
                                                              attempting to remove weeds or debris
                                                              from the jet intakes or impeller areas; shut
                                                              off the engines, remove the main switch
                                                              keys, and then remove the engine shut-off
                        1  Access port cap                    cord (lanyard) from the  engine shut-off
                                                              switch.
                        (3) Close the rear platform hatch.
                                                              Fuel system checks
                        Jet intake checks                     Check the fuel filler hoses and joints in the
                        Carefully check the jet intakes under the boat  engine compartment for damage, loose-
                        for weeds, debris, or anything else that might  ness, and signs of leaking. At least annually,
                        restrict the intake of water. If the intakes are  or if a problem is suspected, check the fuel
                        clogged, cavitation could occur, reducing jet  tank and fuel filler hoses and clamps. Have
                        thrust, and possibly  damaging jet pump  a Yamaha Boat Dealer check the fuel tank
                        parts.                                and fuel filler hoses and clamps. WARNING!
                                                              If there are signs of leaking fuel, do not
                                                              operate the boat until the source of the
                                                              fuel leak is found and corrected. Gasoline
                                                              and its vapors are highly flammable and
                                                              explosive.







                                                                                             156]]></page><page Index="166"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 157  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                        Pre-operation checks

                        Engine oil level check                1800 cc engine models (4-star)
                        Make sure that the engine oil level is between
                        the minimum level mark and maximum level
                        mark on the dipstick. (See page 145 for infor-          1
                        mation on checking the engine oil level.)
                        1800 cc engine models (3-star)







                                                              1  Dipstick
                          1




                        1  Dipstick
                                                                                      1
                                                                                         2



                                                1
                                                   2
                                                              1  Maximum level mark
                                                              2  Minimum level mark
                                                              1900 cc engine models


                        1  Maximum level mark
                        2  Minimum level mark



                                                              1





                                                              1  Dipstick







                        157]]></page><page Index="167"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 158  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                                                                Pre-operation checks

                                                              255XE / 255XD



                                                1                     2      1          2
                                                   2



                                                                                               1



                        1  Maximum level mark
                        2  Minimum level mark                 1  Positive (+) battery terminal: Red lead
                                                              2  Negative (–) battery terminal: Black lead
                        Battery check
                                                              Bilge water check
                        Make sure that the battery terminals are not
                                                              Make sure that no bilge water has collected in
                        damaged and that the battery leads are con-
                                                              the engine compartment. If bilge water has
                        nected properly.  WARNING! The  battery
                                                              collected in the engine compartment drain it.
                        must always be fully charged and in good
                                                              (See page 147 for information on draining the
                        condition. Loss of battery power may
                                                              bilge water.)
                        leave you stranded. Never  operate the
                        boat if the start battery does not have suf-
                                                              Drain plug check
                        ficient power to start the engines or if it
                                                              Loosen the drain plug and remove them, and
                        shows any other signs of decreased pow-
                                                              then make sure that the plug and the O-ring
                        er.
                                                              on the hull drain plug are not damaged and
                        Except for 255XE / 255XD
                                                              that there is no foreign material on the
                                                        2
                                 2                            threads or the O-ring on the hull drain plug.
                                                              NOTICE: Before installing the drain plug,
                                                              clean the  drain plug threads and the  O-
                                                              ring on the hull drain plug to remove any
                                                              foreign materials, such as dirt or sand.
                                                              Otherwise, the drain plug could be dam-
                                                              aged, allowing water to enter the engine
                                                              compartment.  Make sure that the drain
                                                 1      1     plug is tightened securely before launch-
                                                              ing the boat. Otherwise, water may flood
                        1  Positive (+) battery terminal: Red lead
                                                              the boat and cause it to submerge.
                        2  Negative (–) battery terminal: Black lead
                                                              Securely install the drain plug by tightening it
                                                              until it stop.





                                                                                             158]]></page><page Index="168"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 159  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                        Pre-operation checks

                                                              1900 cc engine models
                                                                 1                  1










                                                  1
                        1  Hull drain plug
                                                              1  Blower
                        Blower checks
                                                              To check the operation using the multi-func-
                             WARNING                          tion display:
                        Gasoline vapors can explode.  Before  Tap  the “Blower” button.  Check that  the
                        starting the engines, check the engine  blowers operate when the button is blue and
                        compartment for gasoline, gasoline va-  that the blowers stop when the button is gray.
                        pors, and loose electrical connections,
                        and then operate the blowers for at least 4
                                                                                     SE
                        minutes. Do not start the engines or oper-  FUEL
                                                                100 %
                        ate the blowers if you can smell gasoline
                        vapors in the  engine compartment or if     19
                                                                           x1000 rpm
                        there are any loose electrical connections.
                        Contact a Yamaha Boat Dealer if there is a
                                                                   START
                        problem you cannot locate or correct.      13.0  V  9
                                                                             Bilge  Blower
                        Make sure that the blowers operate properly.
                                                                                  1
                        1800 cc engine models
                                                              1  “Blower” button
                                                  1
                                                              252S / 252SE / 252SD / 255XE / 255XD
                                                              To check the operation using the switch pan-
                                                              el:
                         1
                                                              Push the “BLOWER” switch. Check that the
                                                              blowers operate when the switch light is on
                                                              and that the blowers stop when the switch
                                                              light is off.


                        1  Blower





                        159]]></page><page Index="169"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 160  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                                                                Pre-operation checks

                        252S                                  Make sure that the bow light and anchor light
                                                              operate properly.
                                                              The procedure for setting up the anchor light
                                                              varies according to the model. See the page
                                                              indicated below for your boat.
                                                    1
                                                              AR250: See page 121.
                                                              SX250: See page 123.
                                                              Except for AR250 / SX250: See page 122.

                                                              TIP:
                                                              SX250: Before operating the boat in daylight
                        1  “BLOWER” switch                    hours after checking the navigation and an-
                                                              chor lights, store the anchor light.
                        252SE / 252SD / 255XE / 255XD
                                                              AR250
                                                                         2

                                                    1                                      1








                        1  “BLOWER” switch
                                                              1  Bow light
                        Navigation and anchor lights checks
                                                              2  Anchor light
                             WARNING
                                                              SX250
                         Do not install lights that could be mis-
                          taken for navigation lights.
                                                                         2
                         Do not install lights that could diminish
                          the visibility of  manufacturer installed
                                                                                        1
                          navigation lights or be confused with the
                          manufacturer installed navigation lights.
                         Do not  install lights  that interfere  with
                          the operator’s ability to maintain proper
                          lookout.
                         Do not modify the manufacturer in-
                          stalled navigation lights.
                                                              1  Bow light
                                                              2  Anchor light



                                                                                             160]]></page><page Index="170"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 161  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                        Pre-operation checks

                        Except for AR250 / SX250              indicator bar to turn the bow light and anchor
                                                              light on or off.
                                            2
                                                              252S / 252SE / 252SD / 255XE / 255XD
                                                        1
                                                              To check the operation using the switch pan-
                                                              el:
                                                              Push the “NAV LIGHTS” switch. Check that
                                                              only the anchor light or both the anchor light
                                                              and bow light come on when the switch light
                                                              comes on and that both lights go off when the
                                                              switch light is off.
                        1  Bow light                          252S
                        2  Anchor light
                        To check the operation using the multi-func-
                        tion display:
                        (1) Tap the “Nav” (Navigation) light button
                            on the system control screen. Check that
                            the bow light and anchor light come on
                            when the button is  blue and that both
                            lights go off when the button is gray.               1
                        (2) Tap the “Anchor” light button on the sys-
                            tem control screen. Check that only the
                            anchor light comes on when the button is  1  “NAV LIGHTS” switch
                            blue and that the anchor light goes off
                            when the button is gray.          252SE / 252SD / 255XE / 255XD
                                           RUNNING MODE
                                 SW
                                                     DEPTH
                                                     .8 9  ft
                                                  19
                                         x1000 rpm
                            H
                                                  HOUSE                          1
                                              9   13.0  V
                                   Nav  Anchor
                                    1    2
                                                              1  “NAV LIGHTS” switch
                        1  “Nav” (Navigation) light button
                        2  “Anchor” light button
                                                              Horn check
                        TIP:                                  Push the “HORN” switch and check that the
                        You can also tap the navigation light indicator  horn sounds.
                        and the anchor light indicator on the status  The switch light comes on while the horn is
                                                              operating.


                        161]]></page><page Index="171"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 162  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                                                                Pre-operation checks

                        AR250 / SX250                         252SE / 252SD / 255XE / 255XD


                               1
                                                                               1
                                        HORN
                                               BILGE







                        1  “HORN” switch                      1  “HORN” switch
                        252S                                  Engine shut-off cord (lanyard) check
                                                              Make sure that the engine shut-off cord (lan-
                                                              yard) is not damaged. If the cord is damaged,
                                                              replace it.  WARNING! Never try to repair
                                         1                    the engine shut-off cord (lanyard) or tie it
                                                              together. The  engine  shut-off cord (lan-
                                                              yard) may not pull free when the operator
                                                              falls off, allowing the boat to continue to
                                                              run and cause an accident.



                        1  “HORN” switch

                        252XE









                                     HORN
                                                              Post-launch checks
                                            BILGE
                                                              Perform the post-launch checks in the pre-
                              1                               operation checklist while  the boat  is in  the
                                                              water and the engines are running.
                        1  “HORN” switch







                                                                                             162]]></page><page Index="172"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 163  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                        Pre-operation checks

                        Engine shut-off switch check          Cooling water pilot outlet check
                        Check the engine shut-off switch for proper  Check that water comes out from the pilot
                        operation.                            outlets while the engines are running in the
                        (1) Start the engines. (See page 165 for in-  water. If water is not circulating, something
                            formation on starting the engines.)  may be clogging the intake grates. Refer to
                        (2) Pull the engine shut-off cord (lanyard) to  “Jet pump clean-out procedure”  on page
                            remove the clip from the engine shut-off  207.
                            switch  to make sure that the engines  Except for 255XE / 255XD
                            stop immediately.
                        (3) Make  sure that  the engines cannot be
                            started with the clip removed from the
                            engine shut-off switch.
                        AR250 / SX250 / 252S





                                                 1

                                          2
                                                              255XE / 255XD




                        1  Engine shut-off switch
                        2  Clip

                        252SE / 252SD / 252XE / 255XE / 255XD



                                                    1



                                                    2




                        1  Engine shut-off switch
                        2  Clip






                        163]]></page><page Index="173"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 164  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                                                                Pre-operation checks


                        TIP:                                  Except for AR250 / SX250
                        It  may take up to 20 seconds for water  to  1
                        reach the pilot outlets when  first launching
                        the boat. The amount and force of the exiting
                        water will vary with engine speed.      FUEL                SE    S
                                                                100 %
                         NOTICE
                                                                   19
                        A continuous flow of water from the pilot         x1000 rpm
                        outlets shows  that water is  flowing                            MPH
                                                                   START
                        through the engine cooling water passag-  13.0  V  9
                        es. If water is not flowing out of the pilot        Bilge  Blower
                        outlets during operation, do not continue  1  Fuel level bar graph
                        to run the engines. Overheating and seri-
                        ous damage could occur. (See “Over tem-  Add fuel if necessary. (See page 142 for infor-
                        perature warning” on pages 75 and 104 for  mation on filling the fuel tank.)
                        more information.)


                        Fuel level check
                        Check the amount of fuel remaining in the
                        fuel tank using the fuel level bar graph on the
                        multi-function display.
                        AR250 / SX250


                                         NW     N      NE
                              FUEL
                              50  %         FLOAT MODE
                          1
                                                    °F
                                             Water Temp
                                 START
                                 11.8  V
                                Bilge  Blower            Nav
                        1  Fuel level bar graph














                                                                                             164]]></page><page Index="174"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 165  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                        Operation

                                Driving your boat             Know  and follow  U.S. Coast Guard, state,
                        Getting to know your boat             and local laws when operating your boat.
                        Operating your boat requires skills acquired  Select a wide area to learn in, where visibility
                        through practice over a period of time. Take  is good and other boat traffic is light. Keep
                        the time to learn the basic techniques well  the proper distance from other boats and ve-
                        before attempting more difficult maneuvers.  hicles.  Do not operate where people  are
                        Boating with your new boat can be a very en-  swimming.
                        joyable activity, providing you with hours of
                        pleasure. But it is essential to familiarize your-
                        self with the operation of the boat to achieve
                        the skill necessary to enjoy boating safely.
                        Before operating this boat, read this own-
                        er’s/operator’s manual, the  Operation  In-
                        struction card, and all labels on the boat. Pay
                        particular attention to the safety information
                        beginning on page 14. These  materials
                        should give you an understanding of the boat  Always attach the engine shut-off cord (lan-
                        and its operation. This boat is designed to  yard) to your PFD before operating.
                        carry one operator and up to 11 passengers.   You  and all  other passengers must always
                                                              wear a USCG-approved PFD when riding in
                          Maximum load (252XE / 255XE / 255XD):  the boat.
                            Total weight of cargo, operator, and   Grip the steering wheel firmly and keep both
                            passengers:                       feet on the deck when driving the boat.
                              1066 kg (2350 lb)
                            Total weight of operator and passen-  Starting the engines
                            gers:
                                                                  WARNING
                              998 kg (2200 lb)
                          Maximum load (AR250 / SX250 / 252S /  Severe injury or death may result if you ig-
                          252SE / 252SD):                     nore any of the following:
                            Total weight of cargo, operator, and    Before operating your boat, become fa-
                            passengers:                        miliar  with all controls. Consult a
                              1180 kg (2600 lb)                Yamaha Boat Dealer about any control
                            Total weight of operator and passen-  or function you do not fully understand.
                            gers:                              Failure to understand how the controls
                              998 kg (2200 lb)                 work could cause  an accident or pre-
                                                               vent you from avoiding an accident.
                                                               Gasoline vapors can  explode.  Before
                        Learning to operate your boat
                                                               starting the engines, check the engine
                        Before boating, always perform the pre-oper-
                                                               compartment for gasoline, gasoline va-
                        ation checks listed on page 151. The short
                                                               pors, and loose electrical connections,
                        time spent checking the boat will reward you
                                                               and then operate the blowers for at least
                        with added safety and reliability.
                                                               4 minutes. Do not start the engines or
                        165]]></page><page Index="175"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 166  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                                                                                  Operation

                          operate the blowers if  you can  smell  drain plug and make sure that the plug is
                          gasoline vapors in the engine compart-  tightened securely  before launching the
                          ment or if there are any loose electrical  boat. Otherwise, water may flood the boat
                          connections. Contact a  Yamaha Boat  and cause it to submerge.
                          Dealer if there is a problem you cannot
                          locate or correct.
                         Attach the engine shut-off cord (lanyard)
                          to your PFD before operating. Failure to
                          attach the cord could  result in a run-
                          away boat if the operator is ejected.
                         Do not apply throttle when anyone is at
                          the rear of the boat. Turn the engines off
                          or keep them at idle. Water and debris
                          exiting the jet thrust nozzles can cause                     1
                          severe injury.
                                                              1  Hull drain plug
                        (1) Always make sure the boat is launched
                            and used in waters that are free from  (2) Turn the battery switch to the ON posi-
                            weeds and  debris,  and at least 90 cm  tion.
                            (3 ft) deep from the bottom of the boat.  (3) Turn the main switch keys to the on po-
                            WARNING! Never operate in water      sition to operate the blowers automati-
                            that is less than 90 cm (3 ft) deep from  cally for 5 minutes.
                            the bottom of the boat. You increase  TIP:
                            your chance of hitting an underwater  To operate the blowers manually, tap the
                            obstacle. You could be injured. Peb-  “Blower” button. Ventilate the engine com-
                            bles or sand can also be sucked into  partment for at least 4 minutes, and then tap
                            the  jet intakes,  damaging the impel-  the “Blower” button again  to turn  off the
                            lers.                             blowers.



                                                                                     SE
                                                                FUEL
                                                                100 %
                                                                    19
                                     90 cm (3 ft)                          x1000 rpm
                                                                   START
                                                                   13.0  V  9
                                                                             Bilge  Blower
                                                                                  1
                         NOTICE                               1  “Blower” button

                        There is a hull drain plug at the bottom of
                        the  stern. Check the O-ring on  the  hull


                                                                                             166]]></page><page Index="176"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 167  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                        Operation


                        TIP:                                     operator falls off, allowing the boat to
                        252S / 252SE / 252SD / 255XE / 255XD: You  continue to  run and cause an  acci-
                        can also push the “BLOWER” switch to ven-  dent.
                        tilate the engine compartment.        AR250 / SX250 / 252S

                        252S                                               1
                                                                     2

                                                                                    3

                                                    1




                                                              1  Engine shut-off switch
                                                              2  Clip
                                                              3  Engine shut-off cord (lanyard)
                        1  “BLOWER” switch
                                                              252SE / 252SD / 252XE / 255XE / 255XD
                        252SE / 252SD / 255XE / 255XD


                                                                                     3
                                                    1


                                                                         1

                                                                         2

                                                              1  Engine shut-off switch
                        1  “BLOWER” switch
                                                              2  Clip
                        (4) Attach the engine shut-off cord (lanyard)  3  Engine shut-off cord (lanyard)
                            to your PFD. Install the clip onto the en-
                                                              TIP:
                            gine shut-off switch by pushing the clip
                                                              The engines will not start when the clip is re-
                            groove over the nut beneath the knob.
                                                              moved from the engine shut-off switch.
                            Be sure the cord is not wrapped around
                                                              (5) Put the remote control levers in the neu-
                            the steering wheel or tangled in the con-
                                                                 tral position. The starter motors will not
                            trols.  WARNING! Check  that the en-
                                                                 operate unless the remote control levers
                            gine shut-off cord (lanyard) is
                                                                 are in neutral.
                            attached correctly. If the engine shut-
                                                              (6) AR250 / SX250 / 252S: Turn  the  main
                            off cord (lanyard) is not attached cor-
                                                                 switch keys to the start position and re-
                            rectly, it may not pull free when the
                        167]]></page><page Index="177"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 168  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                                                                                  Operation

                            lease them when the engines start. If the  (8) 252SE / 252SD / 252XE / 255XE / 255XD:
                            engines do not start after 5 seconds of  Push the “START/STOP” buttons and re-
                            cranking, release the keys. Wait at least  lease them when the engines start. If the
                            15 seconds before trying to start the en-  engines do not start after 5 seconds of
                            gines again.                         cranking, release the buttons. Wait at
                                                                 least 15 seconds before trying to start
                                                                 the engines again. NOTICE: If the start-
                                                                 er motors are engaged continuously
                                                                 for more than 5 seconds, the start bat-
                                      HORN
                                             BILGE
                                                                 tery will become quickly discharged
                                                                 and it will be impossible to start the
                                                                 engines. The starter motors may also
                                                                 be damaged if they are engaged con-
                                                                 tinuously for more than 5 seconds.


                         NOTICE
                         Never turn the main switch keys to the
                          start position while the engines are run-
                          ning. The starter mechanisms could be
                          damaged.
                         If the starter motors are engaged con-
                          tinuously for more than 5 seconds, the
                                                                               1
                          start battery will become quickly dis-
                          charged and it will be impossible to start  1  “START/STOP” button
                          the  engines. The starter motors may
                          also be damaged if they are engaged  On this boat, the engines are connected di-
                          continuously for more than 5 seconds.  rectly to the drive units. Starting either engine
                                                              generates some thrust immediately. Only
                        (7) 252SE / 252SD / 252XE / 255XE / 255XD:
                                                              enough throttle should be applied to keep the
                            Turn the main switch key to the on posi-
                                                              engine at a fast enough idle to stay running.
                            tion.
                                                              TIP:
                                                              Immediately after starting  the engines, the
                                                              engine speed will not increase even if you ap-
                                                              ply the throttle. To increase the engine speed
                                                              after starting the engines, wait a few seconds
                                                              before applying the throttle.







                                                                                             168]]></page><page Index="178"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 169  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                        Operation

                        Stopping the engines                  TIP:
                             WARNING                          The engines can also be stopped by pulling
                                                              the engine shut-off cord (lanyard).
                        Once the engines have stopped, you have
                        NO STEERING CONTROL over  the boat.
                                                              (2) Push the “START/STOP” buttons.
                        You could collide with another boat,  a
                        dock, or other obstacle.
                        Stopping the engines immediately after oper-
                        ating at  high  engine speeds is  not recom-
                        mended. Let the engines cool off at idle or
                        low speed for a few minutes first.
                        To stop the engines (AR250 / SX250 / 252S):
                        (1) Return the remote control levers to the
                            neutral position.
                        (2) Turn the main switch keys to the off po-           1
                            sition.                           1  “START/STOP” button

                                                              TIP:
                                                              The engines can also be stopped by pulling
                                      HORN                    the engine shut-off cord (lanyard).
                                             BILGE
                                                              (3) Turn the main switch key to the off posi-
                                                                 tion.






                        TIP:
                        The engines can also be stopped by pulling
                        the engine shut-off cord (lanyard).

                        (3) Remove the main switch keys and the
                            engine shut-off cord (lanyard) if the boat
                            will be left unattended.          (4) Remove the main switch key and the en-
                                                                 gine shut-off cord (lanyard) if the boat will
                        To stop the engines (252SE / 252SD / 252XE  be left unattended.
                        / 255XE / 255XD):
                        (1) Return the remote control levers to the  Leaving a dock
                            neutral position.                 Because boats steer from the stern, the stern
                                                              first moves in the direction opposite your de-
                                                              sired turn. It is especially important to under-
                                                              stand this characteristic when leaving a dock.


                        169]]></page><page Index="179"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 170  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                                                                                  Operation

                        If you move the remote control levers to the  higher the engine speed, the more thrust is
                        forward position and simply turn the steering  produced.
                        wheel to steer the bow away from the dock,  The amount of jet thrust, in addition to the po-
                        as you  would when driving a car out of a  sition of the steering wheel, determines how
                        parking space, you will drive the stern of the  sharply you turn.
                        boat into the dock.                   A. More throttle produces high thrust, so
                        The following  steps  are basic maneuvering  the boat will turn more sharply.
                        techniques which can be used in most cir-
                        cumstances:                           A
                        (1) With the engines idling and the bow still
                            moored to the dock, turn the steering
                            wheel toward the dock. Moving the re-
                            mote control levers into the TDE position
                            or forward position will start to move the
                            stern of the boat away from the dock.
                        (2) When the stern is out a few feet, release
                            the bow  mooring, and then turn  the
                            steering wheel to the center position or
                                                              B. Less throttle produces low thrust, so the
                            away from the dock. Move the remote
                                                                 boat will turn more gradually.
                            control levers into  the reverse  position
                            and move away from the dock.      B
                        Turning the boat
                             WARNING
                         Do not pull the remote control levers
                          back to idle when trying to steer away
                          from objects — you need throttle to
                          steer.
                         Be sure passengers are holding on be-
                          fore making turns. An unprepared pas-  C. Pulling the remote control levers back to
                          senger could lose balance and fall.    idle or the neutral position produces only
                                                                 minimum thrust. If you are traveling  at
                        Steering control depends on the combination
                                                                 speeds above trolling, you will have rap-
                        of steering wheel position and the amount of
                                                                 idly decreasing ability  to steer without
                        throttle.
                                                                 throttle. You may still have some turning
                        Water sucked in through the intake grates is
                                                                 ability immediately after pulling the re-
                        pressurized by the impellers in the jet pumps.
                                                                 mote control levers back to  idle, but
                        As the pressurized water is expelled from the
                                                                 when the engines slow down, the boat
                        pumps through the jet thrust nozzles, it cre-
                                                                 will no longer respond to steering wheel
                        ates thrust to move and steer the boat. The
                                                                 input until you apply throttle again or you
                                                                 reach a trolling speed.
                                                                                             170]]></page><page Index="180"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 171  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                        Operation

                            At trolling speed, the boat can be turned  Turning left
                            gradually by steering wheel  position
                            alone using  just the  amount of thrust
                            available at engine idle.
                         C








                                                              Turning right



                        D. If the boat is moving and the remote con-
                            trol levers are in the neutral position, or if
                            there is no thrust because  the engines
                            are stopped, the  boat will  go  straight
                            even though the steering wheel is turned.
                            You need throttle to steer.

                         D

                                                              Boating with passengers
                                                                  WARNING
                                                              When  passengers are on board,  make
                                                              sure they are seated and holding onto the
                                                              handgrips, handrails, or straps before you
                                                              start  to accelerate. An  unprepared pas-
                                                              senger could lose balance and fall.
                                                              Your boat is designed for one operator and
                                                              up to 11 passengers only. Never have more
                                                              than 12 people in the boat. Passengers must
                                                              sit in one of the seats and hold onto the hand-
                                                              grips. Passengers should sit so the weight in
                                                              the boat is balanced from side-to-side and
                                                              bow-to-stern as much as possible. If the pas-
                                                              senger seat in front of the helm is used, be
                                                              sure  the operator’s  view ahead is not ob-
                                                              structed.


                        171]]></page><page Index="181"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 172  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                                                                                  Operation

                                                              The  boat  is not equipped with a  separate
                          Maximum load (252XE / 255XE / 255XD):
                                                              braking system. It is stopped by water resis-
                            Total weight of cargo, operator, and
                                                              tance after the remote control levers  are
                            passengers:
                                                              moved back to idle. The stopping distance is
                              1066 kg (2350 lb)
                                                              different depending on the model.
                            Total weight of operator and passen-
                                                              1800 cc engine models (3-star):
                            gers:
                                                               152 m (498 ft)
                              998 kg (2200 lb)
                                                              1800 cc engine models (4-star):
                          Maximum load (AR250 / SX250 / 252S /
                                                               123 m (403 ft)
                          252SE / 252SD):
                                                              1900 cc engine models:
                            Total weight of cargo, operator, and
                                                               138 m (453 ft)
                            passengers:
                                                              The stopping distance varies depending on
                              1180 kg (2600 lb)
                                                              gross weight, water surface conditions, and
                            Total weight of operator and passen-
                                                              wind direction. The stated straight-line stop-
                            gers:
                                                              ping distance should be used for a reference.
                              998 kg (2200 lb)
                                                              The boat slows down as soon as the remote
                                                              control levers are returned to idle but will
                        Stopping the boat                     coast for a distance before fully stopping. If
                                                              you are not sure you can stop in time before
                             WARNING
                                                              hitting an obstacle, apply throttle and turn in
                         Allow adequate stopping distance.   another direction.
                         Take early action to avoid collisions. Re-  1800 cc engine models (3-star)
                          member, boats do not have brakes.   255XE / 255XD
                         Operate defensively at safe speeds and
                          keep a safe distance away from people,
                          objects, and other boats to give you time
                          to stop.                                 152 m (498 ft)
                         Do not shut the engines off when slow-
                          ing down in case you need engine power
                          to steer away from a boat or other ob-
                          stacle that comes into your path.
                         You will lose steering control if you com-
                          pletely  pull the remote control levers
                          back to idle. You need throttle to steer.
                         Do not use the reverse function to slow
                          down or stop the boat  from planing
                          speed as it could cause you to lose con-
                          trol, be ejected, or impact the steering
                          wheel or other  parts of the boat.  This
                          could increase the risk of serious injury.




                                                                                             172]]></page><page Index="182"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 173  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                        Operation

                        1800 cc engine models (4-star)         inhaled. Symptoms include nausea, diz-
                        AR250 / SX250 / 252S / 252SE / 252XE   ziness, and drowsiness.
                                                              (1) Be sure the engines are off,  and  then
                                                                 move to the stern of the boat.
                             123 m (403 ft)                   (2) Pull out the stern ladder and  climb up
                                                                 onto the swim platform. (See page 125
                                                                 for information on the stern ladder.)






                        1900 cc engine models
                        AR250 / SX250 / 252S / 252SE / 252SD /
                        252XE




                             138 m (453 ft)                   (3) Return the stern ladder to the stowed po-
                                                                 sition, and then sit in one of the seats
                                                                 provided.

                                                              Boarding from the bow
                                                              A bow ladder is available when boarding from
                                                              the bow of the boat is desired, when the boat
                                                              is beached. (See page 124 for bow ladder us-
                        Boarding from the water               ing procedures.)
                             WARNING
                                                              Boarding from a dock or landing jetty
                        To avoid  severe injury or death, do  not
                                                              (1) Board the boat from the side. One per-
                        board from the rear, use swim platform, or
                                                                 son should board at a time by stepping
                        swim behind boat if the engines are run-
                                                                 into the boat. Never jump in. Avoid step-
                        ning.
                                                                 ping  on slick gelcoat  surfaces on the
                         Severe internal injuries can occur if wa-
                                                                 boat’s gunwales, especially if wet.
                          ter is forced into body cavities as a re-
                                                              (2) Sit in one of the seats provided and put
                          sult of being near the jet thrust nozzles.
                                                                 both feet on the deck.
                         Exhaust gases coming from underneath
                          the swim platform contain carbon mon-
                                                              Docking
                          oxide, a colorless, odorless gas which
                                                              (1) Make  sure no obstructions, boats, or
                          may cause brain damage or death when
                                                                 swimmers are close to the boat. Come to
                                                                 a stop before you reach the dock.
                        173]]></page><page Index="183"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 174  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                                                                                  Operation

                        (2) Notice how wind and water currents are
                            affecting boat movement as you attach      Wind or current
                            your mooring lines and fenders.
                        (3) Approach the dock at idle speed. Use re-
                            verse as necessary during  slow-speed
                            maneuvering to help control speed and
                            direction. Position the boat according to
                            wind and water conditions. WARNING!
                            Do not use your hand, arm, or other
                            parts of your body to try to keep the
                            boat from hitting the dock. You could
                                                              No wind or current:
                            be injured if the boat pushes against  Approach the dock at a shallow angle. Se-
                            the dock.                         cure the bow to the dock, and then use en-
                                                              gine thrust or a boat hook to gently move the
                        Wind or current pushing boat away from   stern to the dock.
                        dock:
                        Slowly approach the dock at about a 45° an-
                                                              To dock using the DRiVE X mode (252SD /
                        gle. Secure the bow to the dock, and then
                                                              255XD):
                        use engine  thrust  or a boat hook to  gently  Move the remote control levers to the neutral
                        move the stern to the dock.           position,  and then  activate the DRiVE X
                                                              mode. (See page 87.)
                                      Wind or current         Pull the throttle/shift paddle (right) to move
                                                              the boat forward or pull the throttle/shift pad-
                                                              dle (left) to move the boat in reverse at a slow
                                                              speed and dock the boat.

                                                                                    1



                                                                    2
                        Wind or current pushing boat toward
                        dock:
                        Slowly maneuver to a shallow angle and al-
                        low the boat to move toward the dock.


                                                              1  Throttle/shift paddle (right)
                                                              2  Throttle/shift paddle (left)








                                                                                             174]]></page><page Index="184"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 175  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                        Operation

                        Beaching                              Anchoring
                         NOTICE                                   WARNING

                         Small pebbles, sand, seaweed, and oth-  Always anchor from the bow. Anchoring
                          er debris can be sucked into the jet in-  from  the stern will  make the boat un-
                          takes  and impair or damage  the    steady. A strong current can pull a stern-
                          impellers. Always stop the engines be-  anchored boat underwater.
                          fore beaching the boat. Be sure the boat
                                                              Select an anchor appropriate for your boat
                          is in water 90 cm (3 ft) deep  from the
                                                              and water conditions. A “Danforth” (or fluke)
                          bottom  of the boat  before starting the
                                                              type anchor is suitable for most applications;
                          engines again.
                                                              your  Yamaha Boat Dealer can help you
                         Do not beach the boat on rocky beach-
                                                              choose an anchor.
                          es. The hull gelcoat and exposed pump
                                                              (1) Make sure the anchor line is securely tied
                          housings can be damaged.
                                                                 to the anchor and to the bow eye or a
                         Pay attention to shifts in tides. Beaching
                                                                 bow cleat.
                          at high tide may make it impossible to
                                                              (2) Move the  boat to the  spot where  you
                          re-launch the boat if the tide recedes.
                                                                 want to lower the  anchor, heading  the
                        (1) Make sure  no obstructions, boats,  or  boat into the wind or current. Stop the
                            swimmers are near the beach.         boat, and then lower the anchor until it
                        (2) Approach the beach slowly and stop the  hits bottom.
                            engines when the water is about 90 cm  (3) While keeping tension on the line, slowly
                            (3 ft) deep from the bottom of the boat.  back up the boat until you have let out
                            Remember: turning is  impossible with  line that is 4–6 times the depth of the wa-
                            the engines stopped.                 ter. For example, if you are anchoring in
                        (3) Get out of the boat and pull the bow up  10 feet of water, let out 40–60 feet of line.
                            on the beach.                        Secure the line.
                        (4) When leaving the beach, push the boat  (4) Pull on the line to be sure the anchor is
                            out into water that is at least 90 cm (3 ft)  holding. Also,  periodically check your
                            deep from the bottom of the boat before  boat’s position against the shoreline to
                            starting the engines.                make sure it is not drifting and dragging
                                                                 the anchor. Reset if necessary.
                                                              (5) To pull in (“weigh”) the anchor, start the
                                                                 engines and move forward, keeping ten-
                                                                 sion on the line as you pull it in. When the
                                                                 anchor line is straight up and down, pull
                                                                 hard to lift the anchor from the bottom
                                                                 material.








                        175]]></page><page Index="185"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 176  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                                                                                  Operation

                        (6) If the anchor is stuck on the bottom, try  To cross a wake or swell, change your speed
                            this: Let out a few feet of anchor line and  and choose the angle at which you cross the
                            secure the line to the boat, again. Slowly  wake or swell. Usually, a slower speed and
                            maneuver the boat around the anchor  “quartering” the wake (crossing at an angle)
                            until the anchor pulls loose. Keep the line  will reduce the jolt.
                            taut during this procedure.       Two other things you may notice. The first is
                                                              that crossing a group of wakes or swells is
                        Crossing wakes and swells             not as easy or smooth as crossing just one
                        You will not always have flat, smooth water.  wake. The second is that when you quarter
                        There will  be  swells and wakes from other  the wake or swell, the boat will try to steer
                        boats, etc.                           away from the wake or swell. When crossing
                        The best way to cross wakes and swells is  at a 45° angle, you may not notice this, but at
                        with the least jolt to you and the boat. Small  a smaller angle, say 10°, it can be very strong.
                        swells are not as difficult to cross as larger  Be prepared to steer and balance as neces-
                        swells or wakes. Crossing a sharp wake gives  sary.
                        more of a jolt than a broad swell.
                                                                  Wake




                                   Sharp wakes

                                                                  90˚
                                                                            45˚
                                                                                     10˚
                                    Broad swell


























                                                                                             176]]></page><page Index="186"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 177  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                        Operation

                             Post-operation checks               alternately pushing the remote control le-
                        These post-operation procedures are devel-  ver up to half throttle and back to idle for
                        oped to help preserve the long-term appear-  10 to 15 seconds. NOTICE: Do not run
                        ance and reliability of your boat. Perform  the engine over 4000 r/min on land. Al-
                        these procedures as soon as possible after  so, do not run  the engine for more
                        the boat is loaded back on the trailer after the  than 15 seconds without  supplying
                        day’s use.                               water,  otherwise, the engine  could
                        Some owners prefer to moor their boat sea-  overheat and/or seize.
                        sonally, rather than keeping it on the trailer  (3) Stop the engine.
                        between uses.  Extended mooring  is not  (4) Wash down the hull, helm, and both jet
                        recommended by Yamaha, but can be        drive units with fresh water.
                        performed if proper precautions are taken  (5) Open the rear platform hatch. (See page
                        to help guard against prolonged environ-  118 for rear platform hatch opening and
                        mental exposure  and marine growth.      closing procedures.)
                        Proper flushing of the cooling system on  (6) Remove the access port caps to let any
                        each engine is not possible with the boat in  water drain  that has pooled  on them.
                        the water. In addition, conditions such as  (See page 207 for access port cap re-
                        stray electrical voltage in the water, marine  moval and installation procedures.) If the
                        organisms, and saltwater corrosion can ad-  boat will be stored on the trailer nearby,
                        versely affect the life of many boat compo-  leave the caps out until you prepare to
                        nents.  NOTICE: Leaving the boat in the  launch the boat again. If the boat will be
                        water for extended periods will accelerate  transported on the trailer any distance,
                        the rate of normal deterioration of the ex-  temporarily reinstall the caps and close
                        posed drive components.                  the hatch until you get home. Open the
                        If you do decide to moor your boat, be sure to  hatch again when you arrive and remove
                        remove it from the water periodically to clean  the caps as before. Leave the caps loose
                        the hull and jet pump areas. The frequency of  until you plan to transport the boat on the
                        maintenance required will depend upon    trailer again. NOTICE: Leaving the ac-
                        whether the water is salt water or fresh water  cess port caps out when you are not
                        and other local water conditions. See  your  using or transporting the boat helps
                        dealer for additional preventative mainte-  keep them from becoming stuck in the
                        nance recommendations on mooring and/or  access ports.
                        saltwater use for your area.          (7) Remove the hull drain plug. (See page
                        (1) After putting the boat on the trailer, flush  147.)
                            the cooling  system  on each engine  to  (8) Rinse  the engine compartment with a
                            prevent the cooling  system from  clog-  small amount of fresh water. Be careful
                            ging up with salt, sand, or dirt. Refer to  not to get water on the air filter area or
                            page 183 for the cooling system flushing  electrical components. Allow any water
                            procedure.                           in the bilge to drain out. After the water
                        (2) Drain residual water from the exhaust  has drained, wipe the engine compart-
                            system by starting the engine, and then  ment and bilge with dry rags.


                        177]]></page><page Index="187"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 178  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                                                                                  Operation

                        (9) Reinstall the hull drain plug.  NOTICE:
                            Tighten the hull drain  plug  securely
                            before launching the boat. Otherwise,
                            water may flood the boat and cause it
                            to submerge. Clean any foreign mate-
                            rial, such  as dirt or sand, from the
                            threads  and the O-ring on the hull
                            drain plug before installing the drain
                            plug.
                        (10) Spray a rust inhibitor, such as Yamaha
                            Silicone Protectant and Lubricant, on
                            metallic parts to minimize corrosion.
                        (11) Use a boat cover designed for your boat,
                            or store the boat in a building or under a
                            canopy or carport in order to prevent rain
                            from falling onto the boat. Because all of
                            the water  will not be drained from  the
                            deck automatically, take sufficient mea-
                            sures to prevent rainwater from entering
                            the boat. NOTICE: Make sure that the
                            turnbuckles on the boat cover do not
                            contact the boat directly when using
                            the cover. Otherwise, the boat could
                            be damaged.
                        (12) Turn the battery switch to the OFF (red)
                            position. (See page 41 for more informa-
                            tion.)
























                                                                                             178]]></page><page Index="188"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 179  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                        Trailering

                                Trailering the boat           Use safety chains between the towing vehicle
                                                              and the trailer so the trailer will not detach
                             WARNING
                                                              completely from the towing vehicle if it acci-
                        Avoid accident and injury from improper  dentally comes loose from the hitch ball.
                        trailering:                           Crisscross the chains under the trailer tongue
                         The  trailer must be matched  for  the  so the tongue will not hit the road surface if it
                          boat’s weight and hull.             falls loose. Rig the chains as tightly as possi-
                         The towing vehicle must have the ca-  ble while allowing just enough slack to permit
                          pacity of pulling the load. Pulling a load  tight turns.
                          that exceeds the towing capacity may  Be sure the tongue weight (vertical weight on
                          cause loss of control.              the hitch point) is correct. Generally, 5% to
                         Be sure the boat is secured to the trailer  10% of the combined weight of the boat and
                          and the trailer is properly hitched to the  trailer should be on the tongue. Too much or
                          towing vehicle before towing.       too little weight can cause difficult steering or
                         Read the manuals supplied with the  trailer swaying.
                          trailer by the manufacturer.
                                                              Trailering checklist
                        A trailer is provided as standard equipment
                                                               Check your state laws to be sure your trail-
                        with your boat. If you need to obtain another
                                                               er meets all regulations, such as proper li-
                        trailer, choose one that  is manufactured  to
                                                               censing, brake, axle load, and safety chain
                        carry a boat of the size and weight of your
                                                               requirements.
                        boat. Check the certification label on the left
                                                               Check the trailer for any loose fasteners or
                        forward side of the trailer. This label  is  re-
                                                               damaged parts.
                        quired to show the Gross Vehicle Weight Rat-
                                                               Check the tires for proper inflation.
                        ing (GVWR), which is the load carrying
                                                               Check the wheel bearings and wheel lug
                        capacity of the trailer plus the trailer’s weight.
                                                               nuts before each trip.
                        Be sure that the total weight of your boat, any
                                                               Check the tail, brake, and turn signal lights
                        cargo, and the trailer weight itself does not
                                                               for proper operation.
                        exceed the GVWR.
                        Hitch
                        The trailer hitch ball must match the size of
                        the socket on the trailer hitch coupler. Hitch-
                        es are divided into classes that specify the
                        Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) and the maxi-
                        mum tongue weight. Always use a hitch rated
                        for the same or higher class. Use a bolted-on
                        or welded-on hitch; clamp-on bumper hitch-
                        es are not recommended. Be sure the trailer
                        hitch’s release handle is latched with the lock
                        pin installed before towing.



                        179]]></page><page Index="189"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 180  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                                                                                   Trailering

                         Secure the bow of the boat to the trailer   Be sure any cargo that must be carried in
                          with the winch line and also with the chain.  the boat as well as the folding windshield
                          Secure the stern eyes to the trailer with tie-  and all hatches are  secured. A durable,
                          downs.                               properly fitting cover, such as the genuine
                                                               Yamaha cover available from your Yamaha
                                                               Boat Dealer designed specifically for your
                                                               boat, is highly recommended to help pro-
                                                               tect your boat  during  transport and stor-
                                                               age.
                                                               Carry a spare tire for the trailer, along with
                                                               sufficient tools to change the tire.
                                                               While traveling, check the wheel hubs on
                                                   1           the trailer whenever you park. If a hub feels
                                                               abnormally hot, have the bearing inspected
                                                               before continuing your trip. On longer trips,
                        1  Bow eye
                                                               it is a good idea to carry a set of spare
                                                               wheel bearings, seals, and races.
                                                               When making a turn, do not cut corners.
                                                               The trailer has a smaller turning circle, so it
                                                               turns more sharply around the corner than
                                                               the towing vehicle.

                                                              Backing your trailer
                                                              It takes practice to back a trailer successfully.
                                         1
                                                              If you are not familiar backing up with a trailer,
                                                              practice first in an open area away from ob-
                        1  Stern eye
                                                              stacles.
                         Take down and store  the  bimini top,  if
                          used. The bimini top is not designed to stay
                          unsecured on the boat at highway speeds.
                          (See page 136 or 140.)
                        TIP:
                        During transport, use a boat cover to prevent
                        any items from blowing out of the boat, or
                        make sure to store any items inside the stor-
                        age compartments and securely close the
                        compartments.
                         Be sure the access port caps are properly
                          installed (see page 207 for more informa-
                          tion) and the rear platform hatch is closed
                          securely.


                                                                                             180]]></page><page Index="190"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 181  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                        Trailering

                        Keep the following points in mind when   sible, have a second person stand aside
                        backing up                               as an observer. Stop when  the wheels
                         Back slowly. Make steering adjustments in  are at least halfway submerged. Set the
                          small steps.                           parking brake.
                         Turn the towing vehicle’s wheels opposite  (5) Remove the bow line from the bow eye.
                          the direction you want the trailer to go.  (6) Back the trailer farther into the water until
                         After the trailer begins moving, turn the  just the tops of the  fenders  show, and
                          towing vehicle to follow it.           then reset the parking brake. Board the
                         Have a second person stand by to help di-  boat and start it. If possible, remain on
                          rect you with hand signals.            the trailer until the engines are warm and
                                                                 are responding to throttle.
                        Launching                             (7) Back the boat out into the water, watch-
                        As a courtesy to other boaters, prepare your  ing carefully for people, other boats, or
                        boat for launching before using the ramp.  obstacles.
                        Each launch may have particular differences,
                        such as ramp angle, prevailing wind, waves,  Loading
                        and water currents. If possible, watch a cou-  (1) Disconnect the trailer  lights from the
                        ple of boaters launch their boats first to notice  towing vehicle.
                        any problems. While every boater develops a  (2) Back the trailer down the ramp as close
                        preferred launch procedure, here is a recom-  to 90° to the shoreline as you can. If pos-
                        mended general procedure:                sible, have a second person act as an
                                                                 observer while standing to the side of the
                                                                 trailer. Stop when the tops of the trailer’s
                                                                 fenders are  about  3 inches above  the
                                                                 waterline.
                                                              (3) With the boat moving at the slowest idle
                                                                 speed, guide the boat onto the support
                                                                 rails. Use throttle only if necessary for
                                                                 steering ability.  WARNING! Using too
                                                                 much throttle  can cause the boat to
                                                                 jump  over the front of  the trailer,
                        (1) Perform the pre-operation checks     which can result in injury to the boat
                            shown on page 151 that can be per-   operator and bystanders.
                            formed on land.                   (4) Make sure the boat is centered on the
                        (2) Remove all trailering tie-down lines from  support rails and is headed straight for
                            the boat and attach your docking lines  the bow stop (bumper board). Ease the
                            and fenders, if used.                boat forward until the bow rests against
                        (3) Disconnect the trailer  lights  from the  the bow stop. NOTICE: The winch line
                            towing vehicle.                      is not designed to pull the boat onto
                        (4) Back the trailer down the ramp as close  the trailer.
                            to 90° to the shoreline as you can. If pos-



                        181]]></page><page Index="191"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 182  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                                                                                   Trailering

                        (5) Attach and  tighten the  winch line.  Lifting
                            NOTICE: The winch line should not be  NOTICE
                            the only line securing the bow during
                            trailering. Use the chain along with the  Do not attach lifting cables to the bow eye,
                            winch to secure the boat to the trailer.  cleats, stern eyes, ski tow hook, or hand-
                                                              grips. Serious damage to the boat can oc-
                                                              cur. Use only a sling designed specifically
                                                              for lifting boats.
                                                              If you need to remove the boat from the water
                                                              without a trailer, use these guidelines:
                                                               Use a sling-type lifting  mechanism  de-
                                                               signed for lifting boats. The sling should be
                                                               covered with a protective material to pre-
                                                   1
                                                               vent damage to the hull gelcoat.
                                                               Use spreader bars to avoid side stress to
                        1  Bow eye                             the hull that may cause cracks in the gel-
                                                               coat and fiberglass.
                        (6) Pull the trailer up the ramp out of the way   Attach guidelines to the bow eye and stern
                            of other boaters. Attach the bow and  eyes to control movement of the boat dur-
                            stern tie-downs. Reconnect the trailer  ing lifting.
                            lights.                            Remove all people and all cargo from the
                                                               boat. Drain any excess water from the bilge
                                                               using the bilge pump.
                                                               Be sure all people are standing clear, and
                                                               then lift the boat slowly and just far enough
                                                               to verify that the boat is securely held and
                                                               properly balanced. If necessary, lower the
                                                               boat again and adjust the slings.
                                                               When ready, lift the boat slowly and care-
                                         1                     fully.

                        1  Stern eye
                        (7) Perform the post-operation checks  on
                            page 177.











                                                                                             182]]></page><page Index="192"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 183  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                        Care and storage

                               Post-operation care            (3) Connect the garden hose to a water tap.
                        Flushing the cooling system           (4) Make sure that the area around the boat
                        Cooling system flushing is essential to pre-  is clear, and then start the engine. Imme-
                        vent the cooling system from  clogging up  diately after the engine starts, fully turn
                        with salt, sand, or dirt.                the water supply on so that water flows
                        (1) Connect the garden hose adapter to a  out continually from the jet thrust nozzle
                            garden hose.                         and cooling water pilot outlet. NOTICE:
                                                                 Never turn on the water before start-
                                                                 ing the engine. The water could flow
                                1                2               back through the muffler into the
                                                                 crankcase causing  severe engine
                                                                 damage. Be sure to turn on the water
                                                                 immediately after starting the engine
                                                                 to prevent engine overheating.
                                                              (5) Run the engine at a fast idle for 3 to 5
                                                                 minutes. If the engine stops while flush-
                                                                 ing, turn the water supply off immediately
                                                                 and perform  the procedure  again from
                        1  Garden hose adapter
                                                                 step 4.
                        2  Garden hose
                                                              (6) Turn off the water supply, and then drain
                        (2) Loosen the flush hose connector cap for  residual water from the exhaust system
                            the engine you are going to flush and re-  by alternately pushing the remote control
                            move it. Insert the garden hose adapter  lever up to half throttle and back to idle
                            into the flush hose connector by pushing  for 10 to 15 seconds.
                            and twisting it until it is securely connect-  (7) Stop the engine. NOTICE: Never have
                            ed.                                  the water on when the engine is not
                                                                 running. The water  could  flow back
                            1                                    through the muffler into the crankcase
                                              3                  causing severe engine damage. Do
                                                                 not run the engine for more than 15
                                                                 seconds  after the water supply  has
                                2
                                                                 been turned off to avoid engine over-
                                                                 heating.
                                                              (8) Remove the garden hose adapter.
                                                              (9) Install and tighten the cap securely.
                                                              (10) Repeat  the flushing procedure for  the
                                                                 other engine.



                        1  Flush hose connector
                        2  Flush hose connector cap
                        3  Garden hose adapter


                        183]]></page><page Index="193"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 184  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                                                                       Care and storage

                        Cleaning the boat                        water when rinsing the engine or en-
                                                                 gine  compartment as severe engine
                             WARNING
                                                                 damage could result.
                        Gasoline and its vapors are highly flamma-  (4) Open the rear platform hatch. (See page
                        ble and explosive. If there is fuel or a fu-  118 for rear platform hatch opening and
                        el/water  mixture   in  the   engine     closing procedures.)
                        compartment, wipe it up immediately with  (5) Remove the access port caps to let any
                        dry rags. Do not operate the boat until the  water drain  that has pooled  on them.
                        source of the fuel leak is found and cor-  (See page 207 for access port cap re-
                        rected.                                  moval and installation procedures.) If the
                                                                 boat will be stored on the trailer nearby,
                         NOTICE                                  leave the caps out until you prepare to

                        Incorrect cleaning can damage vinyl. See  launch the boat again. If the boat will be
                        “Basic stain guide” on page 186, and  "Chil  transported on the trailer any distance,
                        Cool Technology  vinyl upholstery  Clean-  temporarily reinstall the caps and close
                        ing & Care" on page 187.                 the hatch until you get home. Open the
                                                                 hatch again when you arrive and remove
                        (1) Remove the hull drain plug. (See page
                                                                 the caps as before. Leave the caps loose
                            147 for hull drain plug removal and instal-
                                                                 until you plan to transport the boat on the
                            lation procedures.)
                                                                 trailer again. NOTICE: Leaving the ac-
                                                                 cess port caps out when you are not
                                                                 using or transporting the boat helps
                                                                 keep them from becoming stuck in the
                                                                 access ports. (See page 207 for more
                                                                 information.)
                                                              (6) Securely install  the hull drain plug by
                                                                 tightening it until it stops. NOTICE: Be-
                                                                 fore installing the hull drain plug, clean
                                                                 the drain plug threads and O-ring to
                                                  1              remove any foreign materials, such as
                        1  Hull drain plug                       dirt or sand. Otherwise, the hull drain
                                                                 plug could be damaged, allowing wa-
                        (2) Clean the  hull, boat  interior, and  drive  ter to enter the hull. Check the O-ring
                            units with a mild natural soap and water.  on the hull drain plug and make sure
                            Rinse with fresh water.              that the hull drain plug is tightened se-
                        (3) Clean the engine and bilge areas with a  curely before launching the boat. Oth-
                            mild natural soap and  rinse with fresh  erwise, water may flood the boat and
                            water. Drain all water and wipe up any re-  cause it to submerge.
                            maining moisture with clean, dry rags.  (7) Spray the exterior of the engines with
                            NOTICE: Be careful not to get water  Yamalube Silicone Protectant  &  Lubri-
                            on the air filter area or electrical com-  cant, or an equivalent.
                            ponents.  Do not use high-pressure

                                                                                             184]]></page><page Index="194"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 185  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                        Care and storage

                        (8) Wax the hull with or other non-abrasive
                            wax designed for marine gelcoat.
                            WARNING! Slippery surfaces can
                            cause falls and injury. Be careful not to
                            apply too much wax on deck and gun-
                            wale stepping surfaces. This will make
                            them slippery.
                        (9) Wipe  all vinyl and  rubber components,
                            such as the seats and engine compart-
                            ment seals, with a quality vinyl protec-
                            tant.  NOTICE: Some  well-known
                            “protectant” products on the market
                            can actually damage vinyl over time.
                            Consult a Yamaha Boat Dealer for de-
                            tails.
                        (10) Vacuum and hose-off the carpeting as
                            necessary. If needed, use  a quality
                            brand-name carpet  cleaner product  to
                            clean soiled areas. NOTICE: Always dry
                            the carpet face up. Never roll up the
                            carpet. Never fold the carpet.
                        (11) Wash the fabric of the bimini top with a
                            mild natural soap in lukewarm water,
                            then rinse. Do not use detergents. Allow
                            to air dry thoroughly before storage.



























                        185]]></page><page Index="195"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 186  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                                                                       Care and storage

                        Basic stain guide
                        Here are basic steps to remove common stains from boat upholstery. Consult a Yamaha Boat
                        Dealer or upholstery-cleaning professional for difficult stains.
                        TIP:
                        The basic stain guide does not apply to Chil Cool Technology vinyl. See page 187 for cleaning
                        Chil Cool Technology vinyl.
                         TYPE OF STAIN                 STEPS
                                                       (rinse with clean, warm water and then dry after application)
                                                             1             2             3
                         General care/Dirt                   A             B             —
                         Chewing gum                         E             A             —
                         Coffee/Tea/Chocolate                B             —             —
                         Grease                              E             B             —
                         Ink*                                C             F             D
                         Ketchup                             A             B             —
                         Lipstick                            C             B             A
                         Mustard                             A             B             C
                         Mildew/Wet leaves*                  C             B             A
                         Motor oil                           B             —             —
                         Permanent marker*                   C             F             D
                         Suntan lotion*                      A             B             —
                         Tar/Asphalt                         E             B             —
                        * May cause permanent staining.

                               A       Medium-soft brush with warm, soapy water
                               B       Mild natural soap
                               C       Isopropyl alcohol (91% is best)
                                       Mixture of 1 tablespoon (15 ml) ammonia, 1/4 cup (60 ml) hydrogen peroxide, and
                               D
                                       3/4 cup (177 ml) water
                               E       Wipe or scrape off excess (chill gum with ice first)
                               F       Name brand ink remover















                                                                                             186]]></page><page Index="196"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 187  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                        Care and storage

                        Chil Cool Technology vinyl upholstery   (3) Disconnect the positive (+) battery lead
                        Cleaning & Care                          (red).
                        Chil Cool Technology  vinyl  upholstery is a  (4) Unfasten the battery strap, and then re-
                        new material that is cooler to the touch than  move the battery from the boat.
                        standard marine vinyl.                Except for 255XE / 255XD
                        Easy care is required to maintain its longevity  3                    2
                        and cooling properties.                        2        4
                        (1) Mix a solution 30:1, (30 parts warm water
                            and 1 part mild NON-BLEACH liquid dish
                            soap).
                        (2) Apply and rub with a soft damp cloth.
                        (3) Rinse with clean warm water and wipe
                            dry.
                        Do use these or similar cleaners                               1      1
                         Mild NON-bleach soap & water
                         409 ®                               1  Positive (+) battery lead (red)
                                  ®
                         Boat Bling  Mild Soap Sauce         2  Negative (–) battery lead (black)
                                  ®
                         Boat Bling  Vinyl Sauce             3  Ground lead (black)
                         Babes™ Seat Soap                    4  Battery strap

                                                              255XE / 255XD
                        Do not use these or similar cleaners
                         NO 303 ®
                         NO Starbrite ®                              2          4      2
                         NO Meguiar’s ®
                         NO Fantastic ®                                  1
                         NO eraser sponges

                        Failure to care for your vinyl properly or use of                      1
                        improper cleaners will damage your vinyl.
                                                                           3        3
                        Battery care
                                                              1  Positive (+) battery lead (red)
                        If the boat will not be used for more than a
                                                              2  Negative (–) battery lead (black)
                        month, remove the battery and store it in a
                                                              3  Battery strap
                        cool, dark place.                     4  Ground lead (black)
                        The battery is located in the engine compart-
                        ment.                                 To store the battery:
                        To remove the battery:                (1) Clean the battery casing and terminals
                        (1) Turn the battery switch to the OFF posi-  using a mixture of baking soda and water
                            tion. (See page 41.)                 (one tablespoon of baking soda to one
                        (2) Disconnect the ground lead (black) and  cup of water).
                            the negative (–) battery lead (black).



                        187]]></page><page Index="197"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 188  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                                                                       Care and storage

                        (2) Apply dielectric grease or petroleum jelly  Long-term storage
                            to the battery terminals  and to all  ex-  Storing your boat for prolonged periods of
                            posed connectors.                 time, such as winter storage in freezing tem-
                        (3) If the battery will be stored for a longer  perature, requires preventative maintenance
                            period, check its state of charge (use a  to ensure against deterioration. It is advisable
                            hydrometer or a voltmeter and load tes-  to have the boat serviced by an authorized
                            ter) at least once a month and recharge  Yamaha Boat Dealer before storage. Howev-
                            the battery if it gets too low.   er, the  following procedures can be per-
                                                              formed by the owner with a minimum of tools.
                        To charge the battery:
                        (1) Remove the caps from the cells. Add dis-  Fuel system
                            tilled  water if necessary  to top up the  Fill the fuel tank with fresh fuel, adding one
                            electrolyte to the proper level.  ounce of Fuel Med RX, available from your
                        (2) Follow the  battery manufacturer’s  in-  Yamaha Boat Dealer, to each gallon of fuel or
                            structions for charging.  WARNING!  use an equivalent according to the manufac-
                            When charging a battery, keep it well  ture’s instructions. (See page 142 for infor-
                            away from sparks and open flames, as  mation on filling the fuel tank.) Do not “top
                            it gives off explosive gases. When us-  off” the tank, because fuel could spill. A full
                            ing a battery charger, connect the bat-  fuel tank is less likely to allow condensation
                            tery to the charger before you turn on  to collect in the tank, reducing the chance of
                            the charger. This will prevent sparking  contaminated fuel. Running the engines with
                            at the terminals that could ignite bat-  treated fuel during  cooling system flushing
                            tery gases.                       will also help protect the fuel system.
                        To install the battery:               TIP:
                        (1) Place the battery  in  the battery holder,  Use of Fuel Med RX eliminates the need to
                            and then fasten the battery using the bat-  drain the fuel system. Consult a Yamaha Boat
                            tery strap.                       Dealer or other qualified mechanic if the fuel
                        (2) Connect the positive (+) battery lead (red)  system is to be drained instead.
                            to the  positive (+) battery terminal.
                            NOTICE: Reversal of the battery leads  Lubrication
                            will damage the electrical parts.  It is advisable to take the boat to a Yamaha
                        (3) Connect the  negative (–)  battery lead  Boat Dealer to have the engines fogged for
                            (black) and the ground lead (black) to the  long-term storage.
                            negative (–) battery terminal.
                        (4) Make sure that the battery is securely  Grease points
                            held in place.                    To keep moving parts sliding or rotating
                                                              smoothly, coat them  with water-resistant
                                                              grease.







                                                                                             188]]></page><page Index="198"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 189  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                        Care and storage


                          Recommended water-resistant grease:
                            YAMALUBE  MARINE GREASE or
                            Yamalube Grease A


                         Throttle cables (AR250 / SX250 / 252S)
                        Grease the throttle-cable inner wires at the
                        pulley wheel of each APS.
                        1800 cc engine models


                                                               Pivot points
                                                              Grease all pivot points  of the  steering and
                                                              shift mechanisms at the pump ends.









                        1900 cc engine models






                                                               Bearing housings
                                                              Grease  the bearing housings through  the
                                                              grease nipples.  NOTICE:  Fill the grease
                                                              slowly and carefully, because it can dam-
                                                              age the hoses and the joints.
                                                              The first  service should  be done after  10
                                                              hours or 1 month by a Yamaha Boat Dealer.
                         Steering cable ball joints and inner wires
                                                              Fill the bearing housings with water-resistant
                        Grease the steering cable and shift cable ball
                                                              grease through the grease nipples.
                        joints at the jet thrust nozzles. Extend the
                        steering cable and shift cable inner wires and  Grease capacity:
                        apply a thin coat of grease to them.      33.0–35.0 cc (1.11–1.18 oz)
                                                              After  first service:  Every 100 hours  or 6
                                                              months (you may do this yourself).




                        189]]></page><page Index="199"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 190  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                                                                       Care and storage


                          Grease capacity:
                            6.0–8.0 cc (0.20–0.27 oz)
                        1800 cc engine models
                                1













                        1  Bearing housing grease nipple
                        1900 cc engine models







                                      1






                        1  Bearing housing grease nipple






















                                                                                             190]]></page><page Index="200"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 191  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                        Maintenance

                                   Maintenance                Removing and installing the engine
                                                              covers
                             WARNING
                                                              The engine cover of each engine is remov-
                        Be sure to turn off the engines when you  able.
                        perform maintenance  unless otherwise  To remove the engine cover:
                        specified. If you are not familiar with ma-  (1) Open the engine hood. (See page 111.)
                        chine servicing, this work should be done  (2) Remove the engine cover screws.
                        by a Yamaha Boat Dealer or other quali-  1800 cc engine models
                        fied mechanic.

                        Maintenance, replacement, or repair of  the
                        emission control devices and system may be
                        performed by any marine SI engine repair es-                       1
                        tablishment or individual. Warranty repair,
                        however, must be performed at an autho-
                        rized Yamaha Boat Dealer. A service manual
                        is available for purchase through a Yamaha
                        Boat Dealer for owners  who have the me-
                        chanical skills, tools, and other equipment
                                                              1  Engine cover screw
                        necessary to perform maintenance not cov-
                        ered by this owner’s/operator’s manual.  1900 cc engine models

                        Owner’s/operator’s manual
                        It is advisable to always carry the own-
                        er’s/operator’s manual with  you whenever  1
                        you use the boat.
                        To protect these materials from water dam-
                        age, it would be a good idea to put them in a
                        waterproof bag. If  your owner’s/operator’s
                        manual is damaged, order a replacement
                        from a Yamaha Boat Dealer.
                        The service information included in this man-  1  Engine cover screw
                        ual is intended to provide you, the owner,
                        with the necessary information for complet-  (3) Lift up the engine cover and remove it.
                        ing  your own preventive  maintenance and
                        minor repairs.











                        191]]></page><page Index="201"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 192  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                                                                             Maintenance

                        1800 cc engine models                 1900 cc engine models





                                                    1








                        1  Engine cover
                                                              (2) Install the engine cover screws.
                        1900 cc engine models                 (3) Close the engine hood.



                             1










                        1  Engine cover

                        To install the engine cover:
                        (1) Place the engine cover in its original po-
                            sition, and then push it down.
                        1800 cc engine models




















                                                                                             192]]></page><page Index="202"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 193  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                        Maintenance

                        Periodic maintenance chart
                        The periodic maintenance chart gives general guidelines for periodic maintenance. Have a
                        Yamaha dealer perform the checks in the following chart. However, maintenance may need
                        to be performed more frequently depending on your operating conditions. If you have any
                        questions, consult a Yamaha dealer.
                        This “√” mark indicates items to be checked and serviced by a Yamaha dealer.
                                                                       Initial  Thereafter every
                                                                               50    100    200
                                Item                Operation                 hours   hours   hours
                                                                        10
                                                                       hours  or 12   or 12   or 24
                                                                             months  months  months
                                                                               *1     *1     *1
                         Fuel hoses, clamps,   Check for damage, and check con-
                         canister, and check   nections and tightening of clamps      √
                         valve
                                           Check cap for damage, and check
                         Fuel filler cap                                              √
                                           seal for cracks and deformation
                         Fuel tank         Check installation            √            √
                         Main switches and
                         engine shut-off   Check operation               √            √
                         switch
                                           Check state of charge and termi-
                         Batteries         nals, and check for broken battery         √
                                           straps
                         Battery leads     Check terminals                            √
                         Battery switches  Check operation               √            √
                         Multi-function display  Check lighting          √            √
                         Neutral switches
                         (AR250 / SX250 /   Check operation              √            √
                         252S)
                         Hatch interlock
                         switches (wet stor-  Check operation            √            √
                         age compartment)
                         Blowers           Check operation               √            √
                         Horn              Check operation               √            √
                         Navigation lights  Check lighting               √            √
                                           Clean filter, check hoses for dam-
                         Electric bilge pump  age, and check tightening of            √
                                           clamps
                         Other electrical com-  Check operation of shower, stereo,   √  √
                         ponents           and other components
                         Steering master   Check operation and tilting mecha-  √      √
                         ASSY              nism, and check for looseness




                        193]]></page><page Index="203"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 194  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                                                                             Maintenance


                                                                       Initial  Thereafter every
                                                                               50    100    200
                                Item                Operation           10    hours   hours   hours
                                                                       hours  or 12   or 12   or 24
                                                                             months  months  months
                                                                               *1     *1     *1
                                           Check hydraulic fluid level, and
                         Steering system (hy-  check for dirt in fluid
                         draulic system)   Check for hydraulic fluid leakage,   √     √
                         (252SD / 255XD)   and check parts for wear and dam-
                                           age
                                           Check operation from steering mas-
                         Steering system   ter ASSY to jet thrust nozzles, and   √    √
                         (252SD / 255XD)   check for free play
                                           Check jet pumps for corrosion
                         Steering system   Check connections of connectors,
                         (electrical system)   and check for looseness   √            √
                         (252SD / 255XD)
                         Steering cables   Check connections and exterior,
                         (except for 252SD /   and lubricate                          √
                         255XD)
                         Throttle/shift pad-  Check operation            √            √
                         dles (252SD / 255XD)
                         Articulating keel (ex-  Check operation, and check link rod
                         cept for 252SD /   for bends and damage                      √
                         255XD)
                                           Check exterior and operation,
                         Remote control le-  check shift operation, and check for   √  √
                         vers
                                           looseness
                         Throttle cables   Check connections and exterior,
                         (AR250 / SX250 /   and lubricate                             √
                         252S)
                                           Check connections and exterior,
                         Shift cables                                                 √
                                           and lubricate (shift gate end)
                         Exhaust hoses, wa-  Check for exhaust leakage, and
                         ter locks, and resona-  check clamps at connections          √
                         tors
                         Drain passages    Remove clogs                               √
                         Drain plug        Check O-ring                  √            √
                         Hull and deck     Check for damage              √            √
                                           Check installation and operation,
                         Windshield and seats                            √            √
                                           and check for damage
                         Wakeboard tower   Check installation, and check for
                         (except for SX250)   damage                     √            √
                         and bimini top
                         Hatches, hinges, and   Check installation       √            √
                         packing seals
                                                                                             194]]></page><page Index="204"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 195  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                        Maintenance


                                                                       Initial  Thereafter every
                                                                               50    100    200
                                Item                Operation                 hours   hours   hours
                                                                        10
                                                                       hours  or 12   or 12   or 24
                                                                             months  months  months
                                                                               *1     *1     *1
                         Ladders (bow and   Check installation           √            √
                         stern)
                         Access port caps  Check exterior and installation            √
                         Spark plugs       Check                         √            √
                         High-pressure fuel   Check connections and exterior,         √
                         hoses             and check for leakage
                         Engine oil        Replace                       √     √      √
                         Engine oil filters  Replace                                  √
                         Air filter elements  Check for damage and dirt               √
                         Intake hoses and   Check for damage, and check con-          √
                         breather hoses    nections
                         Throttle bodies   Lubricate throttle valves                  √
                         Anodes (engines)  Check for corrosion                              √ *2
                         Valve clearance   Check and adjust                                 √ *2
                         Rubber couplings  Check for looseness and noise                     √
                         Engine mounts     Check for damage and peeling                      √
                         Cooling water hoses   Check for damage, and check con-
                         and cooling water pi-  nections                                     √
                         lot outlet hoses
                         Water inlet strainers  Check for damage         √            √
                         Intake grates     Check for damage              √            √
                                           Check for bends, damage, and for-
                         Impellers                                       √            √
                                           eign material
                         Impeller ducts    Check and lubricate                        √
                                           Check for damage and lubricate
                         Drive shaft spline                                                  √
                                           splines
                                           Check bearings and grease condi-
                         Jet pump bearings                                                   √
                                           tion
                         Jet thrust nozzles  Check movement, and lubricate            √
                         Intermediate hous-  Lubricate                                √
                         ings
                         Anodes (jet pump   Check for corrosion                       √
                         units)
                        *1: Whichever comes first.
                        *2: Check every 200 hours.
                        Perform the pre-operation checks and  post-operation checks  before  performing  periodic
                        maintenance.


                        195]]></page><page Index="205"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 196  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                                                                            Specifications

                                  Specifications (1800 cc engine models [3-star])

                                         Item                             Specification
                         Boat capacity
                         Maximum people on board             12 person
                         Maximum load capacity               1066 kg (2350 lb)
                         Dimensions and weight
                         Length                              7470 mm (294.0 in)
                         Beam                                2580 mm (102.0 in)
                         Height                              2900 mm (114.0 in)
                         Draft                               520 mm (20.5 in)
                         Dry weight                          255XE
                                                             2061 kg (4544 lb)
                                                             255XD
                                                             2129 kg (4694 lb)
                         Performance
                         Maximum fuel consumption (for each engine)  80.7 L/h (21.3 US gal/h, 17.8 Imp.gal/h)
                         Cruising range at full throttle     1.76 hour
                         Trolling speed                      1250 ±100 r/min
                         Engine
                         Number of engines                   2
                         Engine type                         Liquid cooled 4-stroke, DOHC
                         Number of cylinders                 4
                         Engine displacement                 1812 cm 3
                         Bore × stroke                       86.0 × 78.0 mm (3.39 × 3.07 in)
                         Compression ratio                   8.5 : 1
                         Valve clearance-intake (cold)       0.14–0.23 mm (0.0055–0.0091 in)
                         Valve clearance-exhaust (cold)      0.36–0.45 mm (0.0142–0.0177 in)
                         Lubrication system                  Wet sump
                         Cooling system                      Water
                         Starting system                     Electric
                         Ignition system                     T.C.I.
                         Spark plug (NGK)                    LFR7A
                         Spark plug gap                      0.8–0.9 mm (0.031–0.035 in)
                         Battery capacity                    12 V, 85 Ah
                         Charging system                     Flywheel magneto
                         Drive unit
                         Propulsion system                   Jet pump
                         Jet pump type                       Axial flow, single stage
                         Impeller rotation                   Counterclockwise
                         Pitch angle                         255XE
                                                             15.1°


                                                                                             196]]></page><page Index="206"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 197  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                        Specifications


                                         Item                             Specification
                                                             255XD
                                                             Port 15.1°
                                                             Starboard 14.6°
                         Transmission                        Direct drive from engine
                         Jet thrust nozzle angle             23+23°
                         Fuel and oil
                         Recommended fuel                    Premium unleaded gasoline
                         Minimum octane rating (PON)         91
                         Minimum octane rating (RON)         95
                         Fuel tank total capacity            284 L (75.0 US gal, 62.5 Imp.gal)
                         Recommended engine oil              YAMALUBE 4W or 4-stroke motor oil




                         Recommended engine oil type SAE     SAE 10W-30, 10W-40, 20W-40, 20W-50
                         Recommended engine oil grade API    API SG or higher
                         Engine oil total quantity           5.3 L (5.60 US qt, 4.66 Imp.qt)
                         Engine oil quantity without oil filter replacement  3.5 L (3.70 US qt, 3.08 Imp.qt)
                         Engine oil quantity with oil filter replacement  3.7 L (3.91 US qt, 3.26 Imp.qt)
                         Fuse amperage
                         Electronic throttle valve fuse      10 A
                         Fuel pump fuse                      10 A
                         Main relay drive fuse               10 A
                         Main fuse                           20 A
                         BCU fuse                            50 A
                         Display/Buzzer/GPS/Audio Controller/Switch
                         Panel fuse                          20 A
                         CLH/CLG/Power Port/USB fuse         20 A
                         Horn fuse                           7.5 A
                         Bilge pump fuse                     4 A
                         Power distribution module fuse      20 A
                         USB fuse                            3 A
                         Accessory fuse                      20 A
                         Steering switch fuse (255XD)        3 A











                        197]]></page><page Index="207"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 198  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                                                                            Specifications

                                  Specifications (1800 cc engine models [4-star])

                                         Item                             Specification
                         Boat capacity
                         Maximum people on board             12 person
                         Maximum load capacity               AR250 / SX250 / 252S / 252SE
                                                             1179 kg (2600 lb)
                                                             252XE
                                                             1066 kg (2350 lb)
                         Dimensions and weight
                         Length                              7470 mm (294.0 in)
                         Beam                                2580 mm (102.0 in)
                         Height                              AR250 / 252SE / 252XE
                                                             2900 mm (114.0 in)
                                                             SX250
                                                             1900 mm (75.0 in)
                                                             252S
                                                             2770 mm (109.0 in)
                         Draft                               520 mm (20.5 in)
                         Dry weight                          AR250
                                                             1846 kg (4070 lb)
                                                             SX250
                                                             1805 kg (3979 lb)
                                                             252S
                                                             1898 kg (4184 lb)
                                                             252SE
                                                             2082 kg (4590 lb)
                                                             252XE
                                                             2027 kg (4469 lb)
                         Performance
                         Maximum fuel consumption (for each engine)  43.8 L/h (11.6 US gal/h, 9.6 Imp.gal/h)
                         Cruising range at full throttle     3.24 hour
                         Trolling speed                      1300 ±100 r/min



















                                                                                             198]]></page><page Index="208"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 199  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                        Specifications


                                         Item                             Specification
                         Engine
                         Number of engines                   2
                         Engine type                         Liquid cooled 4-stroke, DOHC
                         Number of cylinders                 4
                         Engine displacement                 1812 cm 3
                         Bore × stroke                       86.0 × 78.0 mm (3.39 × 3.07 in)
                         Compression ratio                   11.0 : 1
                         Valve clearance-intake (cold)       0.14–0.23 mm (0.0055–0.0091 in)
                         Valve clearance-exhaust (cold)      0.28–0.37 mm (0.0110–0.0146 in)
                         Lubrication system                  Wet sump
                         Cooling system                      Water
                         Starting system                     Electric
                         Ignition system                     T.C.I.
                         Spark plug (NGK)                    LFR6A
                         Spark plug gap                      0.8–0.9 mm (0.031–0.035 in)
                         Battery capacity                    12 V, 85 Ah
                         Charging system                     Flywheel magneto
                         Drive unit
                         Propulsion system                   Jet pump
                         Jet pump type                       Axial flow, single stage
                         Impeller rotation                   Counterclockwise
                         Pitch angle                         14.7°
                         Transmission                        Direct drive from engine
                         Jet thrust nozzle angle             23+23°


























                        199]]></page><page Index="209"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 200  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                                                                            Specifications


                                         Item                             Specification
                         Fuel and oil
                         Recommended fuel                    Regular unleaded gasoline
                         Minimum octane rating (PON)         86
                         Minimum octane rating (RON)         90
                         Fuel tank total capacity            284 L (75.0 US gal, 62.5 Imp.gal)
                         Recommended engine oil              YAMALUBE 4W or 4-stroke motor oil





                         Recommended engine oil type SAE     SAE 10W-30, 10W-40, 20W-40, 20W-50
                         Recommended engine oil grade API    API SJ or higher
                         Engine oil total quantity           5.3 L (5.60 US qt, 4.66 Imp.qt)
                         Engine oil quantity without oil filter replacement  3.5 L (3.70 US qt, 3.08 Imp.qt)
                         Engine oil quantity with oil filter replacement  3.7 L (3.91 US qt, 3.26 Imp.qt)
                         Fuse amperage
                         Electronic throttle valve fuse      10 A
                         Fuel pump fuse                      10 A
                         Main relay drive fuse               10 A
                         Main fuse                           20 A
                         Battery fuse                        30 A
                         BCU fuse (252SE / 252XE)            50 A
                         Display/Buzzer/GPS/Audio Controller/Switch
                         Panel fuse                          20 A
                         CLH/CLG/Power Port/USB fuse         20 A
                         Horn fuse                           7.5 A
                         Bilge pump fuse                     4 A
                         Power distribution module fuse      20 A
                         USB fuse                            3 A
                         Accessory fuse                      20 A


















                                                                                             200]]></page><page Index="210"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 201  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                        Specifications

                                       Specifications (1900 cc engine models)

                                         Item                             Specification
                         Boat capacity
                         Maximum people on board             12 person
                         Maximum load capacity               AR250 / SX250 / 252S / 252SE / 252SD
                                                             1179 kg (2600 lb)
                                                             252XE
                                                             1066 kg (2350 lb)
                         Dimensions and weight
                         Length                              7470 mm (294.0 in)
                         Beam                                2580 mm (102.0 in)
                         Height                              AR250 / 252SE / 252SD / 252XE
                                                             2900 mm (114.0 in)
                                                             SX250
                                                             1900mm (75.0 in)
                                                             252S
                                                             2770 mm (109.0 in)
                         Draft                               520 mm (20.5 in)
                         Dry weight                          AR250
                                                             1824 kg (4021 lb)
                                                             SX250
                                                             1783 kg (3931 lb)
                                                             252S
                                                             1876 kg (4136 lb)
                                                             252SE
                                                             2059 kg (4539 lb)
                                                             252SD
                                                             2127 kg (4689 lb)
                                                             252XE
                                                             2067 kg (4557 lb)
                         Performance
                         Maximum fuel consumption (for each engine)  59.6 L/h (15.7 US gal/h, 13.1 Imp.gal/h)
                         Cruising range at full throttle     2.38 hour
                         Trolling speed                      1500 ±100 r/min
















                        201]]></page><page Index="211"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 202  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                                                                            Specifications


                                         Item                             Specification
                         Engine
                         Number of engines                   2
                         Engine type                         Liquid cooled 4-stroke, DOHC
                         Number of cylinders                 4
                         Engine displacement                 1898 cm 3
                         Bore × stroke                       88.0 × 78.0 mm (3.46 × 3.07 in)
                         Compression ratio                   11.2 : 1
                         Valve clearance-intake (cold)       0.14–0.23 mm (0.0055–0.0091 in)
                         Valve clearance-exhaust (cold)      0.28–0.37 mm (0.0110–0.0146 in)
                         Lubrication system                  Wet sump
                         Cooling system                      Water
                         Starting system                     Electric
                         Ignition system                     T.C.I.
                         Spark plug (NGK)                    LFR6A
                         Spark plug gap                      0.8–0.9 mm (0.031–0.035 in)
                         Battery capacity                    12 V, 85 Ah
                         Charging system                     Flywheel magneto
                         Drive unit
                         Propulsion system                   Jet pump
                         Jet pump type                       Axial flow, single stage
                         Impeller rotation                   Counterclockwise
                         Pitch angle                         16.1°
                         Transmission                        Direct drive from engine
                         Jet thrust nozzle angle             23+23°


























                                                                                             202]]></page><page Index="212"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 203  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                        Specifications


                                         Item                             Specification
                         Fuel and oil
                         Recommended fuel                    Regular unleaded gasoline
                         Minimum octane rating (PON)         86
                         Minimum octane rating (RON)         90
                         Fuel tank total capacity            284 L (75.0 US gal, 62.5 Imp.gal)
                         Recommended engine oil              YAMALUBE 4W or 4-stroke motor oil





                         Recommended engine oil type SAE     SAE 10W-30, 10W-40, 20W-40, 20W-50
                         Recommended engine oil grade API    API SG or higher
                         Engine oil total quantity           4.3 L (4.55 US qt, 3.78 Imp.qt)
                         Engine oil quantity without oil filter replacement  2.5 L (2.64 US qt, 2.20 Imp.qt)
                         Engine oil quantity with oil filter replacement  2.6 L (2.75 US qt, 2.29 Imp.qt)
                         Fuse amperage
                         Electronic throttle valve fuse      10 A
                         Fuel pump fuse                      10 A
                         Main relay drive fuse               10 A
                         Main fuse                           20 A
                         Battery fuse (AR250 / SX250 / 252S)  30 A
                         BCU fuse (252SE / 252SD / 252XE)    50 A
                         Display/Buzzer/GPS/Audio Controller/Switch
                         Panel fuse                          20 A
                         CLH/CLG/Power Port/USB fuse         20 A
                         Horn fuse                           7.5 A
                         Bilge pump fuse                     4 A
                         Power distribution module fuse      20 A
                         USB fuse                            3 A
                         Accessory fuse                      20 A
                         Steering switch fuse (252SD)        3 A

















                        203]]></page><page Index="213"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 204  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                                                                       Trouble recovery

                                                   Troubleshooting
                        If you have any trouble with your boat, use this section to check for the possible cause. If you
                        cannot find the cause or if the procedure for replacement or repair is not described in this own-
                        er’s/operator’s manual, ask your Yamaha Boat Dealer or a qualified mechanic for the proper
                        service.

                        Troubleshooting chart
                        The Troubleshooting  chart contains:  “TROUBLE,” “POSSIBLE  CAUSE,” “REMEDY,” and
                        “PAGE.”
                        Check the possible cause and remedy, and also the referred page for the maintenance steps
                        to solve the trouble.
                          TROUBLE            POSSIBLE CAUSE                 REMEDY          PAGE
                         Starter mo-  Engine shut-off   Clip on cord is not in   Install clip in engine shut-off
                         tor does not   switch (252SE /   place     switch                   41
                         turn over   252SD / 252XE /
                                     255XE / 255XD)
                                     Fuse          Burned out       Replace fuse and check wiring  212
                                     Battery       Run down         Recharge                187
                                                   Poor terminal con-  Tighten as required  187
                                                   nections
                                                   Battery switch off  Turn on switch        41
                                     Rear platform   Not latched    Latch securely          118
                                     hatch
                                     Starter compo-  Faulty         Have serviced by Yamaha   —
                                     nent                           Boat Dealer
                                     Remote control   Not in neutral posi-  Move remote control lever to   44
                                     lever         tion             neutral position
                                     Throttle/shift pad-  Squeezed  Release
                                     dle (252SD /                                            48
                                     255XD)




















                                                                                             204]]></page><page Index="214"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 205  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                        Trouble recovery


                          TROUBLE            POSSIBLE CAUSE                 REMEDY          PAGE
                         Starter mo-  Engine shut-off   Clip on cord is not in   Install clip in engine shut-off
                         tor turns   switch (AR250 /   place        switch                   41
                         over/engine   SX250 / 252S)
                         does not    Fuel          Empty            Refill as soon as possible  142
                         start
                                                   Stale or contaminat-  Have serviced by Yamaha   —
                                                   ed               Boat Dealer
                                     Fuel tank     Water or dust col-  Have serviced by Yamaha   —
                                                   lected           Boat Dealer
                                     Spark plug    Fouled or defective  Have serviced by Yamaha   —
                                                                    Boat Dealer
                                     Crankcase     Filled with fuel  Have serviced by Yamaha   —
                                                                    Boat Dealer
                                                   Filled with water  Have serviced by Yamaha   —
                                                                    Boat Dealer
                                     Fuel filter   Clogged or water   Have serviced by Yamaha   —
                                                   collected        Boat Dealer
                         Warning is   Over temperature  Jet intake clogged  Clean           207
                         displayed   warning*      Cooling system   Clean
                                                   clogged                                  163
                                     Oil pressure   Oil pressure dropped  Have serviced by Yamaha   —
                                     warning*                       Boat Dealer
                                     Fuel          Empty            Refill as soon as possible  142
                                     Checking engine   Faulty sensors  Have serviced by Yamaha   —
                                     warning                        Boat Dealer
                         Engine runs   Fuel        Empty            Refill as soon as possible   142
                         irregularly or            Stale or contaminat-  Have serviced by Yamaha
                         stalls                    ed               Boat Dealer              —
                                                   Incorrect octane   Use correct fuel      142
                                                   number
                                     Fuel filter   Water or dust col-  Have serviced by Yamaha   —
                                                   lected           Boat Dealer
                                     Fuel tank     Water or dirt present  Have serviced by Yamaha   —
                                                                    Boat Dealer
                                     Spark plug    Fouled or defective   Have serviced by Yamaha   —
                                                                    Boat Dealer
                                                   Incorrect heat range   Have serviced by Yamaha   —
                                                                    Boat Dealer
                                                   Gap incorrect    Have serviced by Yamaha   —
                                                                    Boat Dealer
                         *Engine speed will be limited to 3500 rpm.






                        205]]></page><page Index="215"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 206  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                                                                       Trouble recovery


                          TROUBLE            POSSIBLE CAUSE                 REMEDY          PAGE
                         Boat speed   Cavitation   Jet intake  clogged  Clean               207
                         too slow or   Engine overheat*  Jet intake clogged   Clean         207
                         loses power
                                                   Cooling system   Clean                   163
                                                   clogged
                                     Fuel filter   Clogged          Have serviced by Yamaha   —
                                                                    Boat Dealer
                                     Spark plug    Fouled or defective   Have serviced by Yamaha   —
                                                                    Boat Dealer
                                                   Incorrect heat range   Have serviced by Yamaha   —
                                                                    Boat Dealer
                                                   Gap incorrect    Have serviced by Yamaha   —
                                                                    Boat Dealer
                                     Fuel          Stale or contaminat-  Have serviced by Yamaha   —
                                                   ed               Boat Dealer
                         *Engine speed will be limited to 3500 rpm.









































                                                                                             206]]></page><page Index="216"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 207  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                        Trouble recovery

                             Emergency procedures
                        Jet pump clean-out procedure
                                                                            2
                             WARNING
                        Severe injury or death may result if you ig-
                        nore any of the following:
                         Turn off and remove both main switch
                          keys, remove the clip from the engine
                          shut-off switch, and wait for all move-
                          ment to stop  before removing the  ac-                              1
                          cess port caps.
                                                              1  Strap eye
                         Never override the interlocks to run the  2  Retaining cord
                          engines with the rear platform hatch
                          open.                               (4) While holding the  handle and  pushing
                         The impellers have sharp  edges.  Be   down, turn the access port cap counter-
                          careful when reaching into jet pump ar-  clockwise until the “SET” mark is aligned
                          eas.                                   with the slot, and then lift the cap by the
                                                                 handle.
                        If weeds or debris get caught in the intakes or
                        impellers, cavitation can occur, and though  NOTICE
                        the engine speed rises, forward thrust will de-   Do not lift or pull the cap with the retain-
                        crease. If this condition is allowed to contin-  ing cord.
                        ue, jet pump damage can occur and the   Set the cap where it cannot be acciden-
                        engines may overheat and seize. If there is  tally knocked overboard.
                        any sign that a  jet intake or impeller is
                        clogged  with  weeds or debris, follow this
                        clean-out procedure.
                        (1) Turn off and remove the main switch key,
                            remove the clip from the engine shut-off
                            switch, and  wait for all movement  to
                            stop.
                        (2) Open the rear platform hatch. (See page
                            118.)                                   1
                        (3) Check that the retaining cord is securely                   2
                            attached to the  access  port cap  and
                            strap eye.                        1  “SET” mark
                                                              2  Slot









                        207]]></page><page Index="217"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 208  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                                                                       Trouble recovery



                                  1



                                                                                          1


                                                                    3
                                                                                        2


                        1  Access port cap                    1  “SET” mark
                                                              2  Slot
                        (5) Remove any weeds or debris from the  3  Edge of the access port
                            drive shaft, impeller, pump housing, and
                            jet thrust nozzle. If you cannot remove  (8) Check that the cap is perpendicular to
                            the debris, consult a Yamaha Boat Deal-  the centerline of the boat. Pull the handle
                            er.                                  forcefully  to make sure  that the cap is
                        (6) To reinstall the access port  cap, first  locked securely. If a strong pull will move
                            clean off any sand or other foreign matter  the access port cap, it is not locked se-
                            from the cap or port surfaces. Apply a  curely—the cap could be forced out by
                            light coat of Yamalube Waterproof Ma-  water pressure during operation.
                            rine Grease (P/N: ACC-GREAS-10-CT), if
                            available, to the seal of the access port
                            cap. If grease is not available, apply the
                            grease  during  the  post-operation
                            checks.                               1
                        (7) Insert the cap so that the “SET” mark is
                            aligned  with  the slot, and then while
                            pushing the handle turn the cap clock-
                            wise until the “SET” mark is aligned with
                            the edge of the access port.
                                                              1  Perpendicular to the centerline of the boat

                                                              (9) Close the rear platform hatch.
                                                              NOTICE
                                                              Be sure the access port caps are locked
                                                              securely in place. Otherwise, the caps
                                                              could be forced out of the access ports by
                                                              water pressure,  causing loss of  perfor-
                                                              mance and possible damage.



                                                                                             208]]></page><page Index="218"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 209  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                        Trouble recovery


                        TIP:
                        The rear platform hatch has interlocks to shut  1
                        off the engines should the hatch be acciden-
                        tally opened during operation.  The engines
                        will not restart unless the hatch is closed and
                        latched.
                                                                                             2
                        Raising the shift gates
                        (252SE / 252SD / 252XE / 255XE /
                        255XD)
                        252SE / 252XE / 255XE: If the shift actuator  1  Shift motor cover
                        malfunctions and the shift gates remain in the  2  Nut
                        lowered position, the boat will not be able to
                        move forward.                         (4) Move the manual release levers of the
                        After raising the shift gates so that the boat  shift motors to the manual operation po-
                        can move forward, immediately return to  sition.
                        shore and have a Yamaha Boat Dealer ser-
                        vice the boat.
                        252SD / 255XD: This model cannot raise the
                        shift gate. If the shift gate remains lowered,
                        immediately contact a Yamaha Boat Dealer
                        or return to port immediately with only the en-
                        gine working properly. (See page 215.)
                        To raise the shift gates:
                        (1) Stop the engines and remove the clip  1
                            from the engine shut-off switch.
                        (2) Open the driver’s side console compart-  1  Manual release lever
                            ment. (See page 115.)
                        (3) Remove the nuts, and then remove the  (5) Use a screwdriver or similar tool to re-
                            shift motor cover.                   move the shift rod covers.

                                                                          1












                                                              1  Shift rod cover


                        209]]></page><page Index="219"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 210  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                                                                       Trouble recovery

                                                              If the shift gates cannot be raised using the
                        (6) Slide the shift rods to port (left) to raise  preceding procedure, the shift gates can be
                            the shift gates to the forward position.  raised manually from the water.
                                                              To raise the shift gates from the water:
                                                              (1) Follow the above steps 1–4 for “To raise
                                                                 the shift gates”.
                                                              (2) Enter the water and move to the rear of
                                                                 the boat.
                                             1                (3) Raise the shift gates to the forward posi-
                                                                 tion.
                                                              (4) Move the manual release levers of the
                                                                 shift motors to the electronic operation
                                                                 position.
                        1  Shift rod
                                                              Power steering system will not
                                                              operate (252SD / 255XD)
                                                              If the power steering system malfunctions, a
                                                              warning will appear on the multi-function dis-
                          1
                                                              play and the direction of the boat cannot be
                                                              changed even if the steering wheel is turned.
                                                              Manually point the jet thrust nozzles in the
                                                              straight-ahead direction, and then use  the
                                                              difference in the amount of throttle for the
                                                              port and starboard engines to steer the boat
                                                              and return to shore. After returning to shore,
                                                              have a Yamaha Boat Dealer check the boat.
                        1  Shift gate
                                                              TIP:
                        TIP:                                  If  a malfunction  is  detected for the power
                         When the manual release levers are in the  steering system, the maximum engine speed
                          manual operation position, the shift gates  will be limited to approximately 5000 rpm.
                          cannot be moved to the neutral or reverse
                          positions.                          To point the jet thrust nozzles in the straight-
                         When the manual release levers are in the  ahead direction:
                          manual operation  position, the boat  will  (1) Stop the engines  and remove the clip
                          move forward even if the remote control le-  from the engine shut-off switch.
                          vers are moved to the reverse position.  (2) Open the driver’s side console compart-
                        (7) Move  the manual release levers of  the  ment. (See page 115.)
                            shift motors to the electronic operation  (3) Turn the service valves on the steering
                            position.                            pump in the direction shown in the illus-
                                                                 tration.




                                                                                             210]]></page><page Index="220"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 211  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                        Trouble recovery

                                                              Turning to port





                                                                                      F
                                                                                      N
                                                                                      R
                                 1


                        1  Service valve
                                                              Turning to starboard
                        (4) Move the cable  holder of the steering
                            cylinder manually  and align the end of
                            the rod with the edge of the bracket.

                                                                                      F
                                               1
                                                                                      N
                                                                                      R
                                                 2   3


                                                              TIP:
                                                              Because the port and starboard engines op-
                                                              erate at the same engine speed when the sin-
                                                              gle lever mode or DRiVE X mode is activated,
                        1  Steering cylinder
                        2  Edge of the bracket                the difference in the amount of throttle for the
                        3  Cable holder                       engines cannot be used to steer the boat.

                        (5) Tighten the service valve.        Jump-starting
                                                                  WARNING
                        To change the steering direction of the boat:
                        Activate the running mode and use the differ-  Severe injury or death may result if you ig-
                        ence in the amount of throttle for the port and  nore any of the following:
                        starboard engines.                     If the blowers will not operate, ventilate
                                                               the engine compartment by opening the
                                                               engine hood for several minutes before
                                                               attempting a jump-start.
                                                               Do not connect the negative (–) jumper
                                                               cable to the negative (–) terminal of the
                                                               dead  battery. Sparks  could ignite bat-



                        211]]></page><page Index="221"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 212  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                                                                       Trouble recovery

                          tery or fuel vapors, which could cause  button for more than 5 seconds. If the
                          an explosion.                          engine does not start in 5 seconds, re-
                                                                 lease  the main switch key or
                        If the  boat battery  runs down,  the engines
                                                                 “START/STOP” button and try again
                        can be started in an emergency using a 12-
                                                                 after 15 seconds.  Continuous crank-
                        volt booster battery and jumper cables.
                                                                 ing for more than 5 seconds will dis-
                        To connect the jumper cables:
                                                                 charge the battery and  the  engines
                        (1) Connect the positive (+) terminal of the
                                                                 will not start. The starter motors may
                            dead battery to the positive (+) terminal
                                                                 also be damaged if they are engaged
                            of the booster battery with the positive
                                                                 continuously for more than 5 seconds.
                            (+) jumper cable.
                        (2) Connect one  end of the negative  (–)
                                                              Fuse replacement
                            jumper cable to the negative (–) terminal
                            of the booster battery.               WARNING
                        (3) Connect the other end of the negative (–)  Do not use fuses  of a higher amperage
                            jumper cable to  an engine hanger.  than recommended. Substitution with  a
                            NOTICE: Be sure all connections are  fuse that has an improper rating can cause
                            secure and correct before attempting  extensive electrical system  damage and
                            to start the engines. Any wrong con-  possible fire.
                            nection may damage  the  electrical
                            system.                           If a fuse is blown, replace it with the proper
                                                              fuse.
                                                              To replace a fuse:
                                                              (1) Open the engine hood. (See page 111.)
                                                              (2) While pushing both sides of the fuse box
                                                                 cover inward, pull the cover toward the
                                                                 bow and remove it.
                           1                       2
                                                              1800 cc engine models




                                     5   4    3
                                                                              1
                        1  Negative (–) jumper cable
                        2  Positive (+) jumper cable
                        3  Start battery
                        4  Booster battery
                        5  Engine hunger
                        (4) Start the engines, and then disconnect  1  Fuse box cover
                            the jumper cables by reversing the above
                            steps. NOTICE: Do not turn the main
                            switch key or push the “START/STOP”


                                                                                             212]]></page><page Index="222"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 213  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                        Trouble recovery

                        1900 cc engine models                 252SE / 252SD / 252XE / 255XE / 255XD
                                                                 1 23       4  5       6 7



                                        1                                                   8
                                                                                            9


                                                                                            8
                                                                          11      10
                        1  Fuse box cover                     1  Electronic throttle valve fuse
                                                              2  Fuel pump fuse
                        AR250 / SX250 / 252S                  3  Main relay drive fuse
                                1 23 4           5 6          4  Main fuse
                                                              5  Spare fuse
                                                              6  Fuse puller
                                                              7  Battery fuse (4-star models)
                                                              8  Screw
                                                              9  BCU fuse
                                                              10 Spare fuse
                                                              11 Unused fuse
                                                              (3) 252SE / 252SD / 252XE / 255XE: When
                                     8       7
                                                                 replacing the BCU fuse,  remove the
                        1  Electronic throttle valve fuse        screws, and then remove the fuse. Install
                        2  Fuel pump fuse
                                                                 the spare fuse, and then tighten the
                        3  Main relay drive fuse
                                                                 screws.
                        4  Main fuse
                                                              (4) When replacing an accessory fuse,  re-
                        5  Fuse puller
                                                                 move the accessory fuse holder or cov-
                        6  Battery fuse
                                                                 er. (Open the rear underseat storage
                        7  Spare fuse
                                                                 compartment [port] to access the acces-
                        8  Unused fuse
                                                                 sory fuse. [See page 114.])













                        213]]></page><page Index="223"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 214  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                                                                       Trouble recovery


                                            2 3 4 5             Fuse amperage:
                                                                  Electronic throttle valve fuse:
                                                                    10 A
                                                                  Fuel pump fuse:
                                           10   9  8  7  6
                                                                    10 A
                                                                  Main relay drive fuse:
                                                                    10 A
                                                1
                                                                  Main fuse:
                                                                    20 A
                                                                  Battery fuse:
                        1  Accessory fuse cover
                                                                    30 A
                        2  Display/Buzzer/GPS/Audio Controller/
                           Switch Panel fuse                      BCU fuse:
                                                                    50 A
                        3  CLH/CLG/Power Port/USB fuse
                        4  Horn fuse                              Display/Buzzer/GPS/Audio Controller/
                        5  Bilge pump fuse                        Switch Panel fuse:
                        6  Power distribution module fuse           20 A
                        7  USB fuse                               CLH/CLG/Power Port/USB fuse:
                        8  Accessory 2 fuse                         20 A
                        9  Accessory 1 fuse                       Horn fuse:
                        10 Steering switch fuse (252SD / 255XD)
                                                                    7.5 A
                                                                  Bilge pump fuse:
                        (5) Replace the blown fuse with the spare
                                                                    4 A
                            fuse of the correct amperage by using
                                                                  Power distribution module fuse:
                            the fuse puller.
                                                                    20 A
                                                                  USB fuse:
                                                                    3 A
                                                                  Accessory 1 fuse:
                                                                    20 A
                                                                  Accessory 2 fuse:
                                                                    20 A
                                                                  Steering switch fuse:
                                                                    3A
                                                              (6) Install the fuse box cover.
                                                              (7) If an accessory fuse was replaced, install
                                                                 the accessory fuse holder or cover.
                                                              (8) Close the engine hood.








                                                                                             214]]></page><page Index="224"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 215  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                        Trouble recovery

                        Running on one engine                 Towing the boat
                         NOTICE                                   WARNING

                        Do not operate the boat above a no-wake   The  operator of  the towing boat  must
                        speed with just one engine.            keep  speed to a minimum  and avoid
                        Severe engine damage could result be-  traffic or obstacles  which could be  a
                        cause water can flood the non-operating  hazard to either boat.
                        engine through the water intake.       The towing line should be long enough
                                                               so the towed boat will not collide with
                        If one engine becomes inoperative, the prop-
                                                               the towing boat when slowing down.
                        erly running engine can be used to return to
                        shore. Operate at a no-wake speed to pre-  The boat should be towed only if it becomes
                        vent water from flooding the non-operating  inoperative.
                        engine  through  the water intake. The no-  The towing rope should be long enough so
                        wake mode can be used for  this purpose.  that the boat will not collide with the towing
                        (See pages 56 and 82.)                boat when slowing  down. A good rule of
                                                              thumb is a tow rope which is three times the
                                                              combined length of the towing boat and the
                                                              boat.
                                                              Tow the boat using the bow eye only. Tow the
                                                              boat at a no-wake speed. NOTICE: Do not
                                                              tow the boat at speed fast enough to leave
                                                              a wake (8 km/h, 5 mph). Severe engine
                                                              damage could result because water can
                                                              flood the non-operating engines through
                                                              the water intakes.










                                                                   1



                                                              1  Bow eye









                        215]]></page><page Index="225"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 216  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                                                               Consumer information

                                                   Limited warranty































































                                                                                             216]]></page><page Index="226"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 217  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                        Consumer information


































































                        217]]></page><page Index="227"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 218  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                                                               Consumer information

                                       YAMAHA EXTENDED SERVICE (Y.E.S.)










                          Keep your Yamaha Boat protected even after   sonable expenses you incur because your
                          the 1-year warranty coverage provisions  Yamaha needs covered service: replace-
                          expire with genuine Yamaha Extended Service  ment vehicle rental, emergency towing,
                          (Y.E.S.).                             phone calls, even food and lodging when
                                                                you are away from home. This superb cov-
                          Y.E.S. is designed and administered by  erage goes into effect when you purchase
                          Yamaha Motor Corporation to provide maxi-  Y.E.S., so it applies to any warranty repairs
                          mum owner satisfaction.You get uninterrupted  as well as covered repairs during your entire
                          factory-backed coverage for extra peace of
                                                                Y.E.S. plan period.
                          mind.
                                                              • Y.E.S. coverage is honored at any autho-
                          • Y.E.S. is flexible. You choose the plan that’s   rized Yamaha dealer nationwide.
                           right for you: 12 months, 24 months, 36
                           months, or up to 48 months on certain mod-  • Y.E.S. coverage is transferable to a new
                           els   beyond the 1-year warranty coverage pe-  owner if you sell or trade-in. That can make
                           riod. That means you can get up to 5 years   your Yamaha Boat much more valuable!
                           of coverage on the power train, controls, and
                           other components to match the comforting   This excellent Y.E.S. plan coverage is only
                           5-year standard protection on the hull.  available to Yamaha owners like you, and only
                                                              while your Yamaha is still within the first year
                          • Y.E.S. is designed and administered by the   of the  Yamaha Limited  Warranty period. So
                           same Yamaha people who handle your war-  visit your authorized Yamaha dealer to get all
                           ranty–and it shows in the comprehensive  the facts. He can show you how easy it is to
                           coverage benefits. There are no limitations   protect your investment with Yamaha Extended
                           on hours of use. Coverage isn’t limited to   Service. We urge you to act now. You’ll get
                           “moving parts” or the “drive train” like many  the excellent benefits of TRIP coverage right
                           other plans. And Y.E.S. covers manufactur-  away, and you’ll rest easy knowing you’ll have
                           ing defects just like the warranty. See the   strong factory-backed protection even after
                           sample contract at your Yamaha dealer to   your Yamaha Limited  Warranty expires. See
                           see how comforting uninterrupted factory-  your dealer today!
                           backed protection can be.
                                                              A special note:
                          • You don’t have to pay anything for cov-
                           ered repairs. There’s no deductible to pay,  If visiting your dealer isn’t convenient, contact
                           and repairs aren’t “prorated.” You don’t have  Yamaha with your Primary ID number or Hull
                           any “out-of-pocket” expenses for covered  Identification Number. We’ll be happy to help
                           repairs.                           you get the Y.E.S. coverage you need.
                          • In addition,  Travel and Recreation      Yamaha Service Marketing
                           Interruption Protection (TRIP) is included  P.O. Box 6555
                           at no extra cost. TRIP gives you up to $250   Cypress, CA 90630
                           reimbursement per occurrence for any rea-  1-(866)-YES-EXTD
                                                                     (1-866-937-3983)





                                                                                             218]]></page><page Index="228"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 219  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                        Consumer information

                                                   Sample float plan
                        Leave a float plan with a responsible person on shore before boating. The example below can
                        be copied and used.


                                                     FLOAT PLAN
                                                   VESSEL INFORMATION
                           BOAT MAKE:      Yamaha              MOTOR TYPE:  Jet
                           MODEL:
                           LENGTH:                             REGISTRATION NO:
                           DECK COLOR:                         HULL COLOR:
                                                       PASSENGER
                           OPERATOR                            EMERGENCY PHONE:
                           ADDRESS:
                           PASSENGER #1:                       EMERGENCY PHONE:
                           ADDRESS:
                           PASSENGER #2:                       EMERGENCY PHONE:
                           ADDRESS:
                           PASSENGER #3:                       EMERGENCY PHONE:
                           ADDRESS:
                           PASSENGER #4:                       EMERGENCY PHONE:
                           ADDRESS:
                                                  DEPARTURE INFORMATION
                           POINT OF DEPARTURE:                 DATE/TIME:
                           TOW VEHICLE            LICENSE:     TRAILER LICENSE:
                           MAKE / MODEL
                                                 DESTINATION INFORMATION
                           DESTINATION:       LORAN OR GPS COORDINATES:   INTENDED ACTIVITY:




                           EXPECTED RETURN    DATE:                       TIME:
                           LOCAL U.S. COAST GUARD PHONE #:
                           NOTES:               HULL COLOR:

                           OPERATOR                            EMERGENCY PHONE:
                           ADDRESS:
                           PASSENGER #1:                       EMERGENCY PHONE:
                           ADDRESS:




                        219]]></page><page Index="229"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 220  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                                                                                         Index

                        A                                     Bimini top, storing in the fully
                        Access port cap check .......................... 156  collapsed position (SX250) ................. 140
                        Accessory outlet .................................... 129  Bimini top, storing in the upright
                        Additional equipment                   position (SX250).................................. 139
                          recommendations................................. 18  Bimini top (SX250).................................. 138
                        Anchor light (AR250) .............................. 121  Bimini top, trailering (AR250 / 252S /
                        Anchor light (except for AR250 /       252XE)................................................. 136
                          SX250) ................................................ 122  Bimini top, trailering (SX250).................. 140
                        Anchor light (SX250) .............................. 123  Blower checks........................................ 159
                        Anchor storage compartment................ 111  “BLOWER” switch.................................... 78
                        Anchoring............................................... 175  Boarding from a dock or landing jetty.... 173
                        Approval labels of emission control   Boarding from the bow .......................... 173
                          certificate................................................ 3  Boarding from the water ........................ 173
                                                              Boat characteristics ................................. 19
                        B                                     Boat control functions.............................. 41
                        Backing your trailer................................ 180  Boating with passengers........................ 171
                        Ballast (252XE / 255XE / 255XD)............ 130  Bow ladder............................................. 124
                        Basic stain guide.................................... 186
                        Batteries and battery switches ................ 41  C
                        Battery care............................................ 187  Check engine warning...................... 75, 104
                        Battery check......................................... 158  Cleaning the boat................................... 184
                        Beaching................................................ 175  Communication error warning.......... 76, 105
                        Bilge pump............................................. 148  Controller ...........................................55, 81
                        “BILGE” switch .................................. 53, 78  Cooling water pilot outlet check ............ 163
                        Bilge water check................................... 158  Crossing wakes and swells.................... 176
                        Bilge water, draining .............................. 147  Cruise assist....................................... 55, 81
                        Bilge water, draining on land ................. 147  Cruising limitations................................... 15
                        Bilge water, draining on water ............... 148
                        Bimini top (252SE / 252SD / 255XE /   D
                          255XD) ................................................ 137  Depth warning.................................. 76, 105
                        Bimini top (AR250 / 252S / 252XE) ........ 133  Docking.................................................. 173
                        Bimini top, installing (252SE / 252SD /  Drain plug check ....................................158
                          255XE / 255XD) .................................. 138  Drive control screen ................................. 93
                        Bimini top, installing (AR250 / 252S /   DRiVE X mode (252SD / 255XD).............. 87
                          252XE) ................................................ 137  Driver’s seat ........................................... 107
                        Bimini top, installing (SX250) ................. 141  Driver’s side console compartment ....... 115
                        Bimini top, removing (252SE / 252SD /  Driving your boat....................................165
                          255XE / 255XD) .................................. 137  E
                        Bimini top, removing (AR250 / 252S /   Emergency procedures.......................... 207
                          252XE) ................................................ 136  Emission control information ..................... 3
                        Bimini top, removing (SX250)................. 141  Enclosed head compartment................. 114
                        Bimini top, setting up (AR250 / 252S /  Engine break-in (255XE / 255XD)........... 150
                          252XE) ................................................ 133  Engine break-in (except for 255XE /
                        Bimini top, setting up (SX250)................ 138  255XD) ................................................ 150
                        Bimini top, storing (AR250 / 252S /   Engine covers, removing and
                          252XE) ................................................ 135
                                                               installing.............................................. 191
                                                                                             220]]></page><page Index="230"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 221  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                        Index

                        Engine hood........................................... 111  I
                        Engine oil ............................................... 144  Identification number records .................... 1
                        Engine oil, checking............................... 145
                        Engine oil level check............................. 157  J
                        Engine oil requirement ........................... 144  Jet intake checks ................................... 156
                        Engine serial numbers................................ 1  Jet pump, cleaning................................. 207
                        Engine shut-off cord (lanyard) check..... 162  Joystick, using ......................................... 53
                        Engine shut-off switch ............................. 41  Jump-starting......................................... 211
                        Engine shut-off switch check................. 163  L
                        Enjoy your boat responsibly..................... 27
                                                              Labels, important ....................................... 7
                        F                                     Labels, other ............................................13
                        Fire extinguisher check.......................... 154  Labels, warning.......................................... 9
                        Fire extinguisher, operating ................... 155  Launching...............................................181
                        Fire extinguisher, storing........................ 154  Learning to operate your boat................ 165
                        Float mode............................................... 87  Leaving a dock....................................... 169
                        Flushing the cooling system .................. 183  Lifting .....................................................182
                        Front underseat storage               Limitations on who may operate the
                          compartments .................................... 112  boat.......................................................14
                        Front walk-through................................. 119  Limited warranty ....................................216
                        Fuel ........................................................ 142  Loading .................................................. 181
                        Fuel level check ..................................... 164  Long-term storage ................................. 188
                        Fuel requirement .................................... 142  Low fuel level warning...................... 76, 105
                        Fuel system checks ............................... 156  Low oil pressure warning ................. 75, 104
                        Fuel system, long-term storage ............. 188  Low voltage warning ..............................105
                        Fuse replacement .................................. 212  Lubrication ............................................. 188

                        G                                     M
                        Galley storage compartment            Main components, location...................... 29
                          (except for AR250 / SX250) ................ 117  Main switch (252SE / 252SD / 252XE /
                        Getting to know your boat ..................... 165  255X / 255XD)....................................... 44
                        Glossary, boat.......................................... 28  Main switch (252SE / 252XE / 255XE) ..... 44
                        Glove compartment ............................... 116  Main switches (AR250 / SX250 / 252S) ... 43
                        Grease points......................................... 188  Maintenance........................................... 191
                                                              Manufactured date labels .......................... 4
                        H                                     Map screen ........................................ 62, 88
                        Hazard information................................... 18  Media screen......................................67, 95
                        Helm controls (AR250 / SX250) ............... 52  Multi-function display elements......... 58, 84
                        Helm controls (except for AR250 /     Multi-function display unit
                          SX250) .................................................. 77  operation......................................... 53, 79
                        High voltage warning ............................. 105
                        Hitch....................................................... 179  N
                        Home screen...................................... 62, 88  “NAV LIGHTS” switch .............................. 79
                        Horn check............................................. 161  Night operation ........................................ 20
                        “HORN” switch .................................. 53, 78  No-wake mode................................... 56, 82
                        Hull Identification Number (HIN) ................ 1


                        221]]></page><page Index="231"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 222  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                                                                                         Index

                        O                                     Specifications (1800 cc engine
                        Operation mode....................................... 87  models [4-star])................................... 198
                        Operational requirements ........................ 16  Specifications (1900 cc engine
                        Over temperature warning ............... 75, 104  models) ...............................................201
                        Owner’s/operator’s manual ................... 191  Star labels (4-star models) ......................... 5
                                                              Starting the engines ............................... 165
                        P                                     “START/STOP” buttons (252SE /
                        Passenger’s seat.................................... 109  252SD / 252XE / 255XE / 255XD)......... 44
                        Periodic maintenance chart ................... 193  Status indicator bar.................................. 86
                        Post-launch checks ............................... 162  Steering.................................................... 46
                        Post-operation care ............................... 183  Steering system checks.........................152
                        Post-operation checks........................... 177  Stern ladder............................................ 125
                        Power steering system will not        Stern storage compartments ................. 118
                          operate (252SD / 255XD).................... 210  Stopping the boat .................................. 172
                        Pre-launch checks ................................. 152  Stopping the engines............................. 169
                        Pre-operation check points ................... 152  Storage compartments .......................... 111
                        Pre-operation checklist.......................... 151  Stowable table ....................................... 116
                        Primary Identification (PRI-ID) number ...... 1  Swim platform........................................ 125
                                                              Swim platform seat (252S / 252SE /
                        R
                        Raising the shift gates (252SE /       252SD / 255XE / 255XD)..................... 109
                          252SD / 252XE / 255XE / 255XD)....... 209  Swim platform shower (252S / 252SE /
                        Rear underseat storage compartment     252SD) ................................................ 126
                          (port) ................................................... 114  Switch panel (252S / 252SE /
                        Rear underseat storage compartment     252SD / 255XE / 255XD)....................... 78
                          (starboard) .......................................... 113  Switch panel (AR250 / SX250) ................. 53
                        Rear walk-through ................................. 119  System control screen ....................... 70, 98
                        Remote control keypad.......................... 128  T
                        Remote control lever checks ................. 152  Throttle/shift paddles checks
                        Remote control levers.............................. 44  (252SD / 255XD) ................................. 153
                        Required equipment ................................ 17  Tilt lever.................................................... 47
                        Reverse RPM control......................... 56, 82  To get more boating safety information... 27
                        Rules of the road...................................... 21  Towing the boat ..................................... 215
                        Running mode.......................................... 87  Trailering checklist ................................. 179
                        Running on one engine.......................... 215  Trailering the boat .................................. 179
                                                              Trip screen ......................................... 66, 92
                        S
                        Sample float plan ................................... 219  Troubleshooting ..................................... 204
                        Screen tab bar ......................................... 85  Troubleshooting chart............................ 204
                        Seating locations ..................................... 26  Turning the boat..................................... 170
                        Seats...................................................... 106  U
                        Setting screen.................................... 71, 99  Underwater seats (252S / 252SE /
                        Side table ............................................... 128  252SD) ................................................ 110
                        Single lever mode .................................... 87  USB chargers......................................... 129
                        Ski locker ............................................... 112
                        Specifications (1800 cc engine
                          models [3-star])................................... 196
                                                                                             222]]></page><page Index="232"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 223  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM



                        Index

                        W
                        Wakeboard tower, collapsing and
                          setting up (252SE / 252SD / 255XE /
                          255XD) ................................................ 132
                        Wakeboard tower, collapsing and
                          setting up (AR250 / 252S / 252XE)..... 131
                        Wakeboard tower (except for SX250).... 131
                        Wakeboarding and water-skiing .............. 20
                        Walk-through ......................................... 119
                        Warnings ................................................ 103
                        Wet storage compartment ..................... 118
                        Windshield ............................................. 120
                        Wireless charger .................................... 130
                        Y
                        YAMAHA EXTENDED SERVICE
                          (Y.E.S.)................................................ 218









































                        223]]></page><page Index="233"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F5K14.book  Page 1  Wednesday, September 6, 2023  2:56 PM










                        For your best ownership experience, think Genuine Yamaha!

                        Genuine Yamaha Parts – Genuine Yamaha replacement parts are the exact same
                        parts as the ones originally equipped on your vehicle, providing you with the
                        performance and durability you have come to expect. Why settle for aftermarket parts
                        that may not provide full confidence and satisfaction?

                        Genuine Yamaha Accessories – Yamaha only offers accessories that meet our
                        high standards for quality and performance. Buy with confidence, knowing your
                        Genuine Yamaha Accessories will fit right and perform right – right out of the box.

                        Yamalube – Take care of your Yamaha with legendary Yamalube oils, lubricants,
                        and care products. They’re formulated and approved by the toughest judges we
                        know: the Yamaha engineering teams that know your Yamaha from the inside out.

                        Genuine Yamaha Service Manuals – Get the same factory manual for your vehicle
                        that the technicians at your authorized Yamaha dealer use. Service manuals are
                        available through your Yamaha dealer or you can order them directly through
                        yamahapubs.com.

                        Genuine Yamaha products are available only from your Yamaha dealer.

                        Find out more at yamaha-motor.com]]></page><page Index="234"><![CDATA[Printed in USA
                        September 2023–0.3 × 1 CR




                                                                                            DIC183]]></page></pages></Search>